WO2024208317A1 - Communication method, apparatus and system - Google Patents
Communication method, apparatus and system Download PDFInfo
- Publication number
- WO2024208317A1 WO2024208317A1 PCT/CN2024/085989 CN2024085989W WO2024208317A1 WO 2024208317 A1 WO2024208317 A1 WO 2024208317A1 CN 2024085989 W CN2024085989 W CN 2024085989W WO 2024208317 A1 WO2024208317 A1 WO 2024208317A1
- Authority
- WO
- WIPO (PCT)
- Prior art keywords
- cyclic shift
- port
- value
- srs
- interval
- Prior art date
Links
- 238000000034 method Methods 0.000 title claims abstract description 173
- 238000004891 communication Methods 0.000 title claims abstract description 97
- 125000004122 cyclic group Chemical group 0.000 claims abstract description 458
- 230000006870 function Effects 0.000 claims description 93
- 230000005540 biological transmission Effects 0.000 claims description 44
- 230000015654 memory Effects 0.000 claims description 27
- 244000126211 Hericium coralloides Species 0.000 claims description 21
- 238000001774 stimulated Raman spectroscopy Methods 0.000 abstract description 10
- LKKMLIBUAXYLOY-UHFFFAOYSA-N 3-Amino-1-methyl-5H-pyrido[4,3-b]indole Chemical compound N1C2=CC=CC=C2C2=C1C=C(N)N=C2C LKKMLIBUAXYLOY-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 41
- 102100031413 L-dopachrome tautomerase Human genes 0.000 description 41
- 101710093778 L-dopachrome tautomerase Proteins 0.000 description 41
- 235000019580 granularity Nutrition 0.000 description 41
- 230000009191 jumping Effects 0.000 description 37
- 238000010586 diagram Methods 0.000 description 33
- 238000012545 processing Methods 0.000 description 32
- 230000008569 process Effects 0.000 description 18
- 238000004590 computer program Methods 0.000 description 14
- 230000011664 signaling Effects 0.000 description 8
- 238000005516 engineering process Methods 0.000 description 7
- 238000005259 measurement Methods 0.000 description 7
- 239000000047 product Substances 0.000 description 5
- 238000013461 design Methods 0.000 description 4
- 230000003993 interaction Effects 0.000 description 4
- 101100233916 Saccharomyces cerevisiae (strain ATCC 204508 / S288c) KAR5 gene Proteins 0.000 description 3
- 230000008878 coupling Effects 0.000 description 3
- 238000010168 coupling process Methods 0.000 description 3
- 238000005859 coupling reaction Methods 0.000 description 3
- 230000000694 effects Effects 0.000 description 3
- 101001121408 Homo sapiens L-amino-acid oxidase Proteins 0.000 description 2
- 102100026388 L-amino-acid oxidase Human genes 0.000 description 2
- -1 SRS1 and SRS2 Chemical compound 0.000 description 2
- 230000009286 beneficial effect Effects 0.000 description 2
- 238000004422 calculation algorithm Methods 0.000 description 2
- 238000004364 calculation method Methods 0.000 description 2
- 230000008859 change Effects 0.000 description 2
- 230000007774 longterm Effects 0.000 description 2
- 230000003287 optical effect Effects 0.000 description 2
- 230000004044 response Effects 0.000 description 2
- 239000013589 supplement Substances 0.000 description 2
- 238000013459 approach Methods 0.000 description 1
- 230000001174 ascending effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 230000008901 benefit Effects 0.000 description 1
- 230000001413 cellular effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 210000001520 comb Anatomy 0.000 description 1
- 230000001934 delay Effects 0.000 description 1
- 238000011161 development Methods 0.000 description 1
- 239000011521 glass Substances 0.000 description 1
- 230000000977 initiatory effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 238000010295 mobile communication Methods 0.000 description 1
- 238000012544 monitoring process Methods 0.000 description 1
- 239000004984 smart glass Substances 0.000 description 1
- 238000006467 substitution reaction Methods 0.000 description 1
Classifications
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04L—TRANSMISSION OF DIGITAL INFORMATION, e.g. TELEGRAPHIC COMMUNICATION
- H04L5/00—Arrangements affording multiple use of the transmission path
Definitions
- the present application relates to the field of communications, and more specifically, to a communication method, device and system.
- the network device can obtain the uplink (UL) channel state of the terminal device according to the sounding reference signal (SRS) sent by the terminal device.
- the network device obtains the downlink (DL) channel state of the terminal device according to channel reciprocity, thereby performing data scheduling for the terminal device.
- the same network device needs to receive SRS from multiple terminal devices to determine the corresponding channel status.
- different cyclic shifts are used to avoid interference between different SRS in the spatial domain.
- the current cyclic shift is randomly selected, and the cyclic shifts corresponding to different SRS have the same possibility, that is, different SRS may collide in the spatial domain. How to reduce the interference between different SRS to improve the accuracy of obtaining channel status is an urgent problem to be solved.
- the present application provides a communication method, device and system, which can reduce interference between different SRSs and improve the accuracy of acquiring channel status.
- an embodiment of the present application provides a communication method, which can be executed by a terminal device, or can also be executed by a chip or circuit for a terminal device, and the present application does not limit this.
- a communication method which can be executed by a terminal device, or can also be executed by a chip or circuit for a terminal device, and the present application does not limit this.
- the following description is taken as an example of execution by a terminal device.
- the method comprises: receiving configuration information of a sounding reference signal SRS resource, wherein the SRS resource comprises N ports, and the configuration information of the SRS resource comprises a cyclic shift reference index, a comb tooth offset value and a sub-interval length L; determining a cyclic shift corresponding to a first port according to the cyclic shift reference index, an index of the first port and a cyclic shift value offset corresponding to the first port, wherein the first port is one of the N ports; wherein the cyclic shift value offset corresponding to the first port is determined according to a sending time of the SRS and/or a comb tooth offset value of the first port, and the sub-interval length.
- the length of the sub-interval is the number of values contained in the sub-interval, and the value is an integer.
- This method refines the design of the randomly selected intervals of the cyclic shift values corresponding to each SRS port. Specifically, the cyclic shift values corresponding to each SRS port will change over time, and the cyclic shift values are randomly selected within a certain interval.
- the network device configures a fine interval of randomly selected cyclic shift values for the terminal device, avoiding the possibility of collision of SRS signals that would not collide, ensuring the orthogonality of SRS, and enabling the network device to obtain accurate channel status, and further perform data scheduling based on the channel status, which can improve communication quality.
- the cyclic shift value offset corresponding to the first port belongs to a first value range
- the first value range is a sub-interval
- the first value range is multiple sub-intervals of length L.
- the cyclic shift value offset corresponding to each port of the N ports is the same.
- a cyclic shift value offset is determined, and the cyclic shift value offset can be applied to N ports.
- the terminal device no longer needs to determine the cyclic shift offset corresponding to each port according to the configuration information of the SRS resource corresponding to each port, thereby reducing the processing complexity of the terminal device.
- the cyclic shift corresponding to the first port satisfies the following relationship:
- ⁇ i is the cyclic shift corresponding to the first port, is the initial cyclic shift value corresponding to the first port, is the maximum cyclic shift value, is the cyclic shift reference index corresponding to the first port, is the value of N, the pi is the index of the first port, the A cyclic shift value offset corresponding to the first port.
- the number of sub-intervals included in the first value range is 1.
- the cyclic shift value bias of the first port is an integer.
- the configuration information of the SRS resource indicates a first interval length
- the first interval length is the length of a sub-interval included in the first value range.
- the cyclic shift value offset corresponding to the first port is determined based on a first numerical value and a sub-interval length, and the first numerical value is determined based on a sending time of the SRS and/or a comb tooth offset value of the first port.
- the cyclic shift value offset corresponding to the first port satisfies the following relationship:
- the is the cyclic shift value offset corresponding to the first port
- the ⁇ is a first value
- the first value is determined according to the sending time of the SRS and a pseudo-random sequence
- the L is the sub-interval length.
- the value range of L is is the maximum cyclic shift value.
- the first value range includes two or more sub-intervals, and any two of the sub-intervals do not overlap in the delay domain.
- the configuration information of the SRS resource further includes an interval interval, where the interval interval represents an absolute value of a difference between the minimum values of the values contained in two adjacent sub-intervals within the first value range,
- the cyclic shift value offset corresponding to the first port is determined according to a first value, the sub-interval length and the interval interval, and the first value is determined according to the transmission time of the SRS and/or the comb tooth offset value of the first port.
- the cyclic shift value offset corresponding to the first port satisfies the following relationship:
- the is the cyclic shift value offset corresponding to the first port
- the ⁇ is a first value
- the first value is determined according to the transmission time of the SRS and the pseudo-random sequence
- the L is the sub-interval length
- the ⁇ is the interval
- the value range of L is is the maximum cyclic shift value.
- the initial cyclic shift value corresponding to the first port satisfies the following relationship:
- the relationship satisfied by the initial cyclic shift value corresponding to the first port is determined according to a preset condition, and the preset condition is related to the number of ports in the SRS resource and the association.
- the preset condition is
- the cyclic shift corresponding to the first port satisfies the following relationship:
- the ⁇ i is the cyclic shift corresponding to the first port, is the initial cyclic shift value corresponding to the first port, is the maximum cyclic shift value, is the cyclic shift value offset corresponding to the first port.
- the function g(x,y) xmody or
- the cyclic shift corresponding to the first port satisfies the following relationship:
- the ⁇ i is the cyclic shift corresponding to the first port, is the initial cyclic shift value corresponding to the first port, is the maximum cyclic shift value, is the cyclic shift reference index corresponding to the first port, is the value of N, the pi is the index of the first port, the is the cyclic shift value offset corresponding to the first port, and the preset condition is
- the configuration information of the SRS resource indicates a first direction, and the first direction is used to determine the positive or negative of a cyclic shift value bias corresponding to the first port.
- the first direction may be predefined, or preconfigured, or configured, that is, the first direction is not necessarily in the configuration information of the SRS resource.
- the network device configures the direction of the cyclic shift bias to the terminal device, that is, the direction of movement of the SRS sequence in the code domain, to avoid the terminal device using the wrong bias direction for cyclic shift, further reducing the possibility of interference between different SRSs.
- the cyclic shift value offset corresponding to the first port satisfies the following relationship:
- the is the cyclic shift value offset corresponding to the first port
- the ⁇ is a first value
- the first value is determined according to the sending time of the SRS and a pseudo-random sequence
- the L is the first interval length
- the value of b represents the first direction.
- the configuration information of the SRS resource includes a first interval length, the first interval length is the length of a sub-interval included in the first value range, the first direction is used to determine the positive or negative of the cyclic shift value offset corresponding to the first port, the cyclic shift value offset corresponding to the first port is determined based on a first numerical value and the first interval length, the first numerical value is determined based on the sending time of the SRS and/or the comb tooth offset value of the first port, the configuration information of the SRS resource also indicates a second interval length, and the sub-interval length of the first value range is the sum of the first interval length and the second interval length.
- the length of the subinterval of the first value range is determined by two length parameters.
- the cyclic shift value offset corresponding to the first port satisfies the following relationship:
- the is the cyclic shift value offset corresponding to the first port
- the ⁇ is a first value
- the first value is determined according to the sending time of the SRS and the pseudo-random sequence
- the ⁇ is a second value
- the second value is determined according to the sending time of the SRS and the pseudo-random sequence
- the L1 is the first interval length
- the L2 is the second interval length.
- L1 value range is
- L2 value range is
- the first value range includes two or more sub-intervals, and any two of the sub-intervals do not overlap in the delay domain.
- the delay domain in the present application may be a code domain.
- any two sub-intervals do not overlap in the delay domain, including two cases: any two sub-intervals have no intersection in the delay domain, and any two sub-intervals have an intersection in the delay domain.
- the configuration information of the SRS resource indicates the length and interval interval of the first sub-interval
- the interval interval represents the absolute value of the difference between the minimum values of the values contained in two adjacent sub-intervals within the first value range
- the first sub-interval is one of the two or more sub-intervals.
- the range of port cyclic shift randomization is expanded, so that the cyclic shift corresponding to each port of the SRS signal changes within a discrete set range over time, which can make the port face different interference at different times, further improving the interference randomization performance.
- the cyclic shift value offset corresponding to the first port satisfies the following relationship:
- the is the cyclic shift value offset corresponding to the first port
- the ⁇ is a first value
- the first value is determined according to the sending time of the SRS and a pseudo-random sequence
- the L3 is the length of the first sub-interval
- the ⁇ is the interval.
- interval interval may be predefined, or preconfigured, or configured, that is, the interval interval is not necessarily in the configuration information of the SRS resource.
- the cyclic shift value offset corresponding to the first port satisfies the following relationship:
- the is the cyclic shift value offset corresponding to the first port
- the ⁇ is a first numerical value
- the first numerical value is determined according to the sending time of the SRS and the pseudo-random sequence
- the value of b represents the first direction
- the L3 is the length of the first sub-interval
- the ⁇ is the interval.
- the configuration information of the SRS resource further indicates a granularity of a cyclic shift bias value corresponding to the first port.
- the cyclic shift corresponding to the first port satisfies the following relationship:
- ⁇ i is the cyclic shift corresponding to the first port, is the initial cyclic shift value corresponding to the first port, is the maximum cyclic shift value, is the cyclic shift reference index corresponding to the first port, is the value of N, the pi is the index of the first port, the is the cyclic shift value offset corresponding to the first port, and K is the granularity of the cyclic shift offset value corresponding to the first port.
- the cyclic shift offset is further refined through the granularity of the cyclic shift offset value, so that the cyclic shift offset has more options and the flexibility of the cyclic shift is improved.
- the value range of K is ⁇ 0,1,2 ⁇ .
- the number of sub-intervals included in the first value range is 1.
- the cyclic shift value bias of the first port is an integer.
- the configuration information of the SRS resource indicates a first interval length
- the first interval length is the length of a sub-interval included in the first value range.
- the cyclic shift value offset corresponding to the first port satisfies the following relationship:
- the is the cyclic shift value offset corresponding to the first port
- the ⁇ is a first value
- the first value is determined according to the sending time of the SRS and the pseudo-random sequence
- the L is the first interval length
- the K is the granularity of the cyclic shift offset value corresponding to the first port.
- the cyclic shift value offset corresponding to the first port satisfies the following relationship:
- the configuration information of the SRS resource indicates a first direction, and the first direction is used to determine the positive or negative of a cyclic shift value bias corresponding to the first port.
- the network device configures the direction of the cyclic shift bias to the terminal device, that is, the direction of movement of the SRS sequence in the code domain, to avoid the terminal device using the wrong bias direction for cyclic shift, further reducing the possibility of interference between different SRSs.
- the cyclic shift value offset corresponding to the first port satisfies the following relationship:
- the is the cyclic shift value offset corresponding to the first port
- the ⁇ is a first numerical value
- the first numerical value is determined according to the sending time of the SRS and the pseudo-random sequence
- the L is the length of the first interval
- the value of b represents the first direction
- the K is the granularity of the cyclic shift offset value corresponding to the first port.
- the cyclic shift value offset corresponding to the first port satisfies the following relationship:
- the configuration information of the SRS resource further indicates a second interval length
- the sub-interval length of the first value range is the sum of the first interval length and the second interval length
- the length of the subinterval of the first value range is determined by two length parameters.
- the cyclic shift value offset corresponding to the first port satisfies the following relationship:
- the is the cyclic shift value offset corresponding to the first port
- the ⁇ is a first value
- the first value is determined according to the sending time of the SRS and the pseudo-random sequence
- the ⁇ is a second value
- the second value is determined according to the sending time of the SRS and the pseudo-random sequence
- the L1 is the first interval length
- the L2 is the second interval length
- the K is the granularity of the cyclic shift offset value corresponding to the first port.
- L1 value range is
- L2 value range is
- the cyclic shift value offset corresponding to the first port satisfies the following relationship:
- L1 value range is
- L2 value range is
- the first value range includes two or more sub-intervals, and any two of the sub-intervals do not overlap in the delay domain.
- the delay domain in the present application may be a code domain.
- any two sub-intervals do not overlap in the delay domain, including two cases: any two sub-intervals have no intersection in the delay domain, and any two sub-intervals have an intersection in the delay domain.
- the configuration information of the SRS resource indicates the length and interval interval of the first sub-interval
- the interval interval represents the absolute value of the difference between the minimum values of the values contained in two adjacent sub-intervals within the first value range
- the first sub-interval is one of the two or more sub-intervals.
- the range of port cyclic shift randomization is expanded, so that the cyclic shift corresponding to each port of the SRS signal changes within a discrete set range over time, which can make the port face different interference at different times, further improving the interference randomization performance.
- the cyclic shift value offset corresponding to the first port satisfies the following relationship:
- the is the cyclic shift value offset corresponding to the first port
- the ⁇ is a first numerical value
- the first numerical value is determined according to the sending time of the SRS and the pseudo-random sequence
- the L3 is the length of the first sub-interval
- the ⁇ is the interval
- the K is the granularity of the cyclic shift offset value corresponding to the first port.
- the cyclic shift value offset corresponding to the first port satisfies the following relationship:
- the cyclic shift value offset corresponding to the first port satisfies the following relationship:
- the is the cyclic shift value offset corresponding to the first port
- the ⁇ is a first numerical value
- the first numerical value is determined according to the sending time of the SRS and the pseudo-random sequence
- the value of b represents the first direction
- the L3 is the length of the first sub-interval
- the ⁇ is the interval
- the K is the granularity of the cyclic shift offset value corresponding to the first port.
- the cyclic shift value offset corresponding to the first port satisfies the following relationship:
- the configuration information of the SRS resource indicates one or more of different first sub-interval lengths, interval intervals, first directions, and cyclic shift bias value granularities for ports occupying different comb teeth.
- the cyclic shift value offsets and value ranges corresponding to SRS ports occupying different comb teeth may be different.
- the configuration information of the SRS resource configures a first set of parameters for the SRS port occupying comb tooth 0, and the first set of parameters includes one or more of the length of the first sub-interval, the interval interval, the first direction, and the granularity of the cyclic shift bias value.
- a second set of parameters is configured for the SRS occupying comb tooth 1, and the second set of parameters includes one or more of the length of the first sub-interval, the interval interval, the first direction, and the granularity of the cyclic shift bias value, and the first set of parameters and the second set of parameters are different.
- the embodiment of the present application provides a communication method, which can be executed by a network device, or can also be executed by a chip or circuit used for a network device, and the present application does not limit this.
- a communication method which can be executed by a network device, or can also be executed by a chip or circuit used for a network device, and the present application does not limit this.
- the following is an example of execution by a network device.
- the method comprises: determining an SRS resource; sending configuration information of a sounding reference signal SRS resource, wherein the SRS resource comprises N ports,
- the configuration information of the SRS resource includes a cyclic shift reference index, a comb tooth offset value and a sub-interval length L;
- the cyclic shift reference index, the index of the first port and the cyclic shift value offset corresponding to the first port are used to determine the cyclic shift corresponding to the first port, and the first port is one of the N ports; wherein the cyclic shift value offset corresponding to the first port is determined according to the sending time of the SRS and/or the comb tooth offset value of the first port, and the sub-interval length.
- the length of the sub-interval is the number of values contained in the sub-interval, and the value is an integer.
- the cyclic shift value offset corresponding to the first port belongs to a first value range
- the first value range is a sub-interval
- the first value range is multiple sub-intervals of length L.
- the cyclic shift value offset corresponding to each port of the N ports is the same.
- the cyclic shift corresponding to the first port satisfies the following relationship:
- ⁇ i is the cyclic shift corresponding to the first port, is the initial cyclic shift value corresponding to the first port, is the maximum cyclic shift value, is the cyclic shift reference index corresponding to the first port, is the value of N, the pi is the index of the first port, the A cyclic shift value offset corresponding to the first port.
- the number of sub-intervals included in the first value range is 1.
- the cyclic shift value bias of the first port is an integer.
- the configuration information of the SRS resource indicates a first interval length
- the first interval length is the length of a sub-interval included in the first value range.
- the cyclic shift value offset corresponding to the first port is determined based on a first numerical value and a sub-interval length, and the first numerical value is determined based on the sending time of the SRS and/or the comb tooth offset value of the first port.
- the cyclic shift value offset corresponding to the first port satisfies the following relationship:
- the is the cyclic shift value offset corresponding to the first port
- the ⁇ is a first value
- the first value is determined according to the sending time of the SRS and a pseudo-random sequence
- the L is the length of the first interval.
- the value range of L is is the maximum cyclic shift value.
- the first value range includes two or more sub-intervals, and any two of the sub-intervals do not overlap in the delay domain.
- the configuration information of the SRS resource further includes an interval interval, where the interval interval represents an absolute value of a difference between the minimum values of the values contained in two adjacent sub-intervals within the first value range,
- the cyclic shift value offset corresponding to the first port is determined according to a first value, the sub-interval length and the interval interval, and the first value is determined according to the transmission time of the SRS and/or the comb tooth offset value of the first port.
- the cyclic shift value offset corresponding to the first port satisfies the following relationship:
- the is the cyclic shift value offset corresponding to the first port
- the ⁇ is a first value
- the first value is determined according to the transmission time of the SRS and the pseudo-random sequence
- the L is the sub-interval length
- the ⁇ is the interval
- the value range of L is is the maximum cyclic shift value.
- the initial cyclic shift value corresponding to the first port satisfies the following relationship:
- the relationship satisfied by the initial cyclic shift value corresponding to the first port is determined according to a preset condition, and the preset condition is related to the number of ports in the SRS resource and the association.
- the preset condition is
- the cyclic shift corresponding to the first port satisfies the following relationship:
- the ⁇ i is the cyclic shift corresponding to the first port, is the initial cyclic shift value corresponding to the first port, is the maximum cyclic shift value, is the cyclic shift value offset corresponding to the first port.
- the function g(x,y) xmody or
- the cyclic shift corresponding to the first port satisfies the following relationship:
- the ⁇ i is the cyclic shift corresponding to the first port, is the initial cyclic shift value corresponding to the first port, is the maximum cyclic shift value, is the cyclic shift reference index corresponding to the first port, is the value of N, the pi is the index of the first port, the is the cyclic shift value offset corresponding to the first port, and the preset condition is
- the configuration information of the SRS resource indicates a first direction
- the first direction is used to determine the positive or negative of a cyclic shift value bias corresponding to the first port.
- the network device configures the direction of the cyclic shift bias to the terminal device, that is, the direction of movement of the SRS sequence in the code domain, to avoid the terminal device using the wrong bias direction for cyclic shift, further reducing the possibility of interference between different SRSs.
- the cyclic shift value offset corresponding to the first port satisfies the following relationship:
- the is the cyclic shift value offset corresponding to the first port
- the ⁇ is a first value
- the first value is determined according to the sending time of the SRS and a pseudo-random sequence
- the L is the first interval length
- the value of b represents the first direction.
- the configuration information of the SRS resource includes a first interval length, the first interval length is the length of a sub-interval included in the first value range, the first direction is used to determine the positive or negative of the cyclic shift value bias corresponding to the first port, the cyclic shift value bias corresponding to the first port is determined based on the first numerical value and the first interval length, the first numerical value is determined based on the sending time of the SRS and/or the comb tooth bias value of the first port, the configuration information of the SRS resource also indicates a second interval length, and the sub-interval length of the first value range is the sum of the first interval length and the second interval length.
- the length of the subinterval of the first value range is determined by two length parameters.
- the cyclic shift value offset corresponding to the first port satisfies the following relationship:
- the is the cyclic shift value offset corresponding to the first port
- the ⁇ is a first value
- the first value is determined according to the sending time of the SRS and the pseudo-random sequence
- the ⁇ is a second value
- the second value is determined according to the sending time of the SRS and the pseudo-random sequence
- the L1 is the first interval length
- the L2 is the second interval length.
- L1 value range is
- L2 value range is
- the first value range includes two or more sub-intervals, and any two of the sub-intervals do not overlap in the delay domain.
- the delay domain in the present application may be a code domain.
- any two sub-intervals do not overlap in the delay domain, including two cases: any two sub-intervals have no intersection in the delay domain, and any two sub-intervals have an intersection in the delay domain.
- the configuration information of the SRS resource indicates the length and interval interval of the first sub-interval
- the interval interval represents the absolute value of the difference between the minimum values of the values contained in two adjacent sub-intervals within the first value range
- the first sub-interval is one of the two or more sub-intervals.
- the range of port cyclic shift randomization is expanded, so that the cyclic shift corresponding to each port of the SRS signal changes within a discrete set range over time, which can make the port face different interference at different times, further improving the interference randomization performance.
- the cyclic shift value offset corresponding to the first port satisfies the following relationship:
- the is the cyclic shift value offset corresponding to the first port
- the ⁇ is a first value
- the first value is determined according to the sending time of the SRS and a pseudo-random sequence
- the L3 is the length of the first sub-interval
- the ⁇ is the interval.
- the cyclic shift value offset corresponding to the first port satisfies the following relationship:
- the is the cyclic shift value offset corresponding to the first port
- the ⁇ is a first numerical value
- the first numerical value is determined according to the sending time of the SRS and the pseudo-random sequence
- the value of b represents the first direction
- the L3 is the length of the first sub-interval
- the ⁇ is the interval.
- the configuration information of the SRS resource further indicates a granularity of a cyclic shift bias value corresponding to the first port.
- the cyclic shift corresponding to the first port satisfies the following relationship:
- ⁇ i is the cyclic shift corresponding to the first port, is the initial cyclic shift value corresponding to the first port, is the maximum cyclic shift value, is the cyclic shift reference index corresponding to the first port, is the value of N, the pi is the index of the first port, the is the cyclic shift value offset corresponding to the first port, and K is the granularity of the cyclic shift offset value corresponding to the first port.
- the cyclic shift offset is further refined through the granularity of the cyclic shift offset value, so that the cyclic shift offset has more options and the flexibility of the cyclic shift is improved.
- the number of sub-intervals included in the first value range is 1.
- the cyclic shift value bias of the first port is an integer.
- the configuration information of the SRS resource indicates a first interval length
- the first interval length is the length of a sub-interval included in the first value range.
- the cyclic shift value offset corresponding to the first port satisfies the following relationship:
- the is the cyclic shift value offset corresponding to the first port
- the ⁇ is a first value
- the first value is determined according to the sending time of the SRS and the pseudo-random sequence
- the L is the first interval length
- the K is the granularity of the cyclic shift offset value corresponding to the first port.
- the cyclic shift value offset corresponding to the first port satisfies the following relationship:
- the configuration information of the SRS resource indicates a first direction
- the first direction is used to determine the positive or negative of a cyclic shift value bias corresponding to the first port.
- the network device configures the direction of the cyclic shift bias to the terminal device, that is, the direction of movement of the SRS sequence in the code domain, to avoid the terminal device using the wrong bias direction for cyclic shift, further reducing the possibility of interference between different SRSs.
- the cyclic shift value offset corresponding to the first port satisfies the following relationship:
- the is the cyclic shift value offset corresponding to the first port
- the ⁇ is a first numerical value
- the first numerical value is determined according to the sending time of the SRS and the pseudo-random sequence
- the L is the length of the first interval
- the value of b represents the first direction
- the K is the granularity of the cyclic shift offset value corresponding to the first port.
- the cyclic shift value offset corresponding to the first port satisfies the following relationship:
- the configuration information of the SRS resource further indicates a second interval length
- the sub-interval length of the first value range is the sum of the first interval length and the second interval length
- the length of the subinterval of the first value range is determined by two length parameters.
- the cyclic shift value offset corresponding to the first port satisfies the following relationship:
- the is the cyclic shift value offset corresponding to the first port
- the ⁇ is a first value
- the first value is determined according to the sending time of the SRS and the pseudo-random sequence
- the ⁇ is a second value
- the second value is determined according to the sending time of the SRS and the pseudo-random sequence
- the L1 is the first interval length
- the L2 is the second interval length
- the K is the granularity of the cyclic shift offset value corresponding to the first port.
- L1 value range is
- L2 value range is
- the cyclic shift value offset corresponding to the first port satisfies the following relationship:
- L1 value range is
- L2 value range is
- the first value range includes two or more sub-intervals, and any two of the sub-intervals do not overlap in the delay domain.
- the delay domain in the present application may be a code domain.
- any two sub-intervals do not overlap in the delay domain, including two cases: any two sub-intervals have no intersection in the delay domain, and any two sub-intervals have an intersection in the delay domain.
- the configuration information of the SRS resource indicates the length and interval interval of the first sub-interval
- the interval interval represents the absolute value of the difference between the minimum values of the values contained in two adjacent sub-intervals within the first value range
- the first sub-interval is one of the two or more sub-intervals.
- the range of port cyclic shift randomization is expanded, so that the cyclic shift corresponding to each port of the SRS signal changes within a discrete set range over time, which can make the port face different interference at different times, further improving the interference randomization performance.
- the cyclic shift value offset corresponding to the first port satisfies the following relationship:
- the is the cyclic shift value offset corresponding to the first port
- the ⁇ is a first numerical value
- the first numerical value is determined according to the sending time of the SRS and the pseudo-random sequence
- the L3 is the length of the first sub-interval
- the ⁇ is the interval
- the K is the granularity of the cyclic shift offset value corresponding to the first port.
- the cyclic shift value offset corresponding to the first port satisfies the following relationship:
- the cyclic shift value offset corresponding to the first port satisfies the following relationship:
- the is the cyclic shift value offset corresponding to the first port
- the ⁇ is a first numerical value
- the first numerical value is determined according to the sending time of the SRS and the pseudo-random sequence
- the value of b represents the first direction
- the L3 is the length of the first sub-interval
- the ⁇ is the interval
- the K is the granularity of the cyclic shift offset value corresponding to the first port.
- the cyclic shift value offset corresponding to the first port satisfies the following relationship:
- the configuration information of the SRS resource indicates one or more of different first sub-interval lengths, interval intervals, first directions, and cyclic shift bias value granularities for ports occupying different comb teeth.
- the cyclic shift value offsets and value ranges corresponding to the SRS ports occupying different comb teeth may be different.
- the configuration information of the SRS resource configures a first set of parameters for the SRS port occupying comb tooth 0, and the first set of parameters includes one or more of the length of the first sub-interval, the interval interval, the first direction, and the granularity of the cyclic shift bias value.
- a second set of parameters is configured for the SRS occupying comb tooth 1, and the second set of parameters includes one or more of the length of the first sub-interval, the interval interval, the first direction, and the granularity of the cyclic shift bias value, and the first set of parameters and the second set of parameters are different.
- the second aspect is an implementation method on the network device side corresponding to the first aspect, and the relevant explanations, supplements, possible implementation methods and descriptions of beneficial effects of the first aspect are also applicable to the third aspect and will not be repeated here.
- an embodiment of the present application provides a communication device, comprising a module for executing the method of the first aspect, or any possible method in the first aspect, or all possible methods in the first aspect.
- an embodiment of the present application provides a communication device, comprising a module for executing the method of the second aspect, or any possible method in the second aspect, or all possible methods in the second aspect.
- the third aspect and the fourth aspect are implementation methods on the device side corresponding to the first aspect and the second aspect respectively.
- the relevant explanations, supplements, possible implementation methods and descriptions of the beneficial effects of the first aspect and the second aspect are also applicable to the third aspect and the fourth aspect respectively, and will not be repeated here.
- an embodiment of the present application provides a communication device, comprising an interface circuit and a processor, wherein the communication device is used to execute the method of the first aspect, or any possible method in the first aspect, or all possible methods in the first aspect.
- an embodiment of the present application provides a communication device, comprising an interface circuit and a processor, wherein the communication device is used to execute the method of the second aspect, or any possible method in the second aspect, or all possible methods in the second aspect.
- an embodiment of the present application provides a computer-readable medium storing a program code for execution on a terminal device, the program code comprising instructions for executing the method of the first aspect or the second aspect, or any possible manner in the first aspect or the second aspect, or all possible manners in the first aspect or the second aspect.
- an embodiment of the present application provides a computer-readable medium storing a program code for execution by a network device, the program code comprising instructions for executing the method of the first aspect or the second aspect, or any possible manner in the first aspect or the second aspect, or all possible manners in the first aspect or the second aspect.
- a computer program product storing computer-readable instructions, which, when the computer-readable instructions are executed on a computer, causes the computer to execute the method of the first aspect, or any possible manner of the first aspect, or all possible manners of the first aspect.
- a computer program product storing computer-readable instructions, which, when the computer-readable instructions are executed on a computer, enables the computer to execute the method of the above-mentioned second aspect, or any possible method of the second aspect, or all possible methods of the second aspect.
- a communication system which includes a device having a method for implementing the above-mentioned first aspect, or any possible manner in the first aspect, or all possible manners in the first aspect, and various possible designed functions, and a device having the second aspect, or any possible manner in the second aspect, or all possible manners in the second aspect, and various possible designed functions.
- a processor is provided, which is coupled to a memory and is used to execute the method of the above-mentioned first aspect, or any possible manner in the first aspect, or all possible manners in the first aspect.
- a processor is provided, which is coupled to a memory and is used to execute the method of the second aspect, or any possible manner of the second aspect, or all possible manners of the second aspect.
- a chip system in a fourteenth aspect, includes a processor and may also include a memory for executing a computer program or instruction stored in the memory, so that the chip system implements the method in any of the first aspect or the second aspect, and any possible implementation of any aspect.
- the chip system may be composed of a chip, or may include a chip and other discrete devices.
- a communication system comprising at least one communication device as described in the third aspect and/or at least one communication device as described in the fourth aspect, and the communication system is used to implement the above-mentioned first aspect or second aspect, or any possible manner in the first aspect or second aspect, or all possible implementation methods in the first aspect or second aspect.
- FIG. 1 is a schematic diagram of a communication system 100 to which an embodiment of the present application is applicable.
- FIG. 2 is a schematic diagram of a comb with three different numbers of comb teeth.
- FIG. 3 is a schematic diagram of a transmission bandwidth and a frequency hopping bandwidth.
- FIG. 4 shows a schematic diagram of a scenario of joint transmission of multiple network devices.
- FIG5 shows a schematic diagram of SRS distribution in the delay domain.
- FIG6 shows a schematic diagram of yet another distribution of SRS in the delay domain.
- FIG. 7 shows a schematic diagram of yet another distribution of SRS in the delay domain.
- FIG8 shows a schematic diagram of yet another distribution of SRS in the delay domain.
- FIG. 9 shows a schematic diagram of a communication method.
- FIG. 10 shows a schematic diagram of SRS distribution in the delay domain.
- FIG. 11 shows a schematic diagram of yet another distribution of SRS in the delay domain.
- FIG. 12 shows a schematic diagram of yet another distribution of SRS in the delay domain.
- FIG13 shows a schematic diagram of a communication device 1300 proposed in this application.
- FIG. 14 shows a schematic structural diagram of a terminal device 1400 applicable to an embodiment of the present application.
- FIG. 15 shows a schematic diagram of a communication device 1500 proposed in this application.
- FIG. 16 shows a schematic diagram of the structure of a network device 1600 applicable to an embodiment of the present application.
- FIG. 17 shows a schematic diagram of yet another distribution of SRS in the delay domain.
- FIG. 18 shows a schematic diagram of yet another distribution of SRS in the delay domain.
- FIG. 19 shows a schematic diagram of yet another distribution of SRS in the delay domain.
- FIG. 20 shows a schematic diagram of yet another distribution of SRS in the delay domain.
- FIG. 21 shows a schematic diagram of yet another distribution of SRS in the delay domain.
- FIG. 22 shows a schematic diagram of yet another distribution of SRS in the delay domain.
- FIG. 23 shows a schematic diagram of yet another distribution of SRS in the delay domain.
- FIG. 24 shows a schematic diagram of yet another distribution of SRS in the delay domain.
- the technical solutions of the embodiments of the present application can be applied to various communication systems, such as: the fifth generation (5th generation, 5G) system or new radio (new radio, NR), long term evolution (long term evolution, LTE) system, LTE frequency division duplex (frequency division duplex, FDD) system, LTE time division duplex (time division duplex, TDD), etc.
- the technical solutions provided in the present application can also be applied to future communication systems, such as the sixth generation mobile communication system.
- the technical solutions of the embodiments of the present application can also be applied to device to device (device to device, D2D) communication, vehicle-to-everything (vehicle-to-everything, V2X) communication, machine to machine (machine to machine, M2M) communication, machine type communication (machine type communication, MTC), and Internet of things (internet of things, IoT) communication system or other communication systems.
- D2D device to device
- V2X vehicle-to-everything
- machine to machine machine to machine
- M2M machine type communication
- MTC machine type communication
- IoT Internet of things
- the terminal equipment in the embodiments of the present application may refer to an access terminal, a user unit, a user station, a mobile station, a mobile station, a relay station, a remote station, a remote terminal, a mobile device, a user terminal, a user equipment (UE), a terminal, a wireless communication device, a user agent or a user device.
- an access terminal a user unit, a user station, a mobile station, a mobile station, a relay station, a remote station, a remote terminal, a mobile device, a user terminal, a user equipment (UE), a terminal, a wireless communication device, a user agent or a user device.
- UE user equipment
- the terminal equipment may also be a cellular phone, a cordless phone, a session initiation protocol (SIP) phone, a wireless local loop (WLL) station, a personal digital assistant (PDA), a handheld device with wireless communication function, a computing device or other processing device connected to a wireless modem, a vehicle-mounted device, a wearable device, a terminal device in a future 5G network or a terminal device in a future evolved public land mobile network (PLMN), etc., and the embodiments of the present application are not limited to this.
- SIP session initiation protocol
- WLL wireless local loop
- PDA personal digital assistant
- PLMN public land mobile network
- wearable devices may also be referred to as wearable smart devices, which are a general term for wearable devices that are intelligently designed and developed by applying wearable technology to daily wear, such as glasses, gloves, watches, clothing, and shoes.
- a wearable device is a portable device that is worn directly on the body or integrated into the user's clothes or accessories. Wearable devices are not only hardware devices, but also achieve powerful functions through software support, data interaction, and cloud interaction.
- wearable smart devices include full-featured, large-sized, and independent of smartphones to achieve complete or partial functions, such as smart watches or smart glasses, as well as devices that only focus on a certain type of application function and need to be used in conjunction with other devices such as smartphones, such as various types of smart bracelets and smart jewelry for vital sign monitoring.
- the terminal device can also be a terminal device in an IoT system.
- IoT is an important part of the future development of information technology. Its main technical feature is to connect objects to the network through communication technology, thereby realizing an intelligent network of human-machine interconnection and object-to-object interconnection.
- IOT technology can achieve massive connections, deep coverage, and terminal power saving through narrowband (NB) technology, for example.
- NB narrowband
- the network device in the embodiment of the present application can be any device with wireless transceiver function for communicating with the terminal device.
- the device includes but is not limited to: evolved Node B (eNB), radio network controller (RNC), Node B (NB), base station controller (BSC), base transceiver station (BTS), home evolved NodeB (HeNB, or home Node B, HNB), baseband unit (BBU), access point (AP) in wireless fidelity (WIFI) system,
- a wireless relay node, a wireless backhaul node, a transmission point (TP) or a transmission and reception point (TRP), etc. can also be a gNB in a 5G, such as NR, system, or a transmission point (TRP or TP), one or a group of (including multiple antenna panels) antenna panels of a base station in a 5G system, or a network node constituting a gNB or a transmission point, such as a baseband unit (BBU), or a distributed unit (DU), etc.
- the gNB may include a centralized unit (CU) and a DU.
- the gNB may also include an active antenna unit (AAU).
- the CU implements some functions of the gNB, and the DU implements some functions of the gNB.
- the CU is responsible for processing non-real-time protocols and services, and implements the functions of the radio resource control (RRC) and packet data convergence protocol (PDCP) layers.
- the DU is responsible for processing physical layer protocols and real-time services, and implements the functions of the radio link control (RLC), media access control (MAC) and physical (PHY) layers.
- the AAU implements some physical layer processing functions, RF processing and related functions of active antennas.
- the network device may be a device including one or more of a CU node, a DU node, and an AAU node.
- the CU may be classified as a network device in an access network (radio access network, RAN), or the CU may be classified as a network device in a core network (core network, CN), and this application does not limit this.
- the terminal device or network device includes a hardware layer, an operating system layer running on the hardware layer, and an application layer running on the operating system layer.
- the hardware layer includes hardware such as a central processing unit (CPU), a memory management unit (MMU), and a memory (also called main memory).
- the operating system can be any one or more computer operating systems that implement business processing through a process, such as a Linux operating system, a Unix operating system, an Android operating system, an iOS operating system, or a Windows operating system.
- the application layer includes applications such as a browser, an address book, a word processing software, and an instant messaging software.
- the embodiment of the present application does not specifically limit the specific structure of the execution subject of the method provided in the embodiment of the present application.
- the execution subject of the method provided in the embodiment of the present application can be a terminal device or a network device, or a functional module in the terminal device or the network device that can call and execute a program.
- computer-readable media may include, but are not limited to: magnetic storage devices (e.g., hard disks, floppy disks or tapes, etc.), optical disks (e.g., compact discs (CDs), digital versatile discs (DVDs), etc.), smart cards and flash memory devices (e.g., erasable programmable read-only memory (EPROM), cards, sticks or key drives, etc.).
- the various storage media described herein may represent one or more devices and/or other machine-readable media for storing information.
- the term "machine-readable storage medium” may include, but is not limited to, wireless channels and various other media capable of storing, containing and/or carrying instructions and/or data.
- FIG. 1 is a schematic diagram of a communication system 100 to which the embodiments of the present application are applicable.
- the communication system 100 may include at least one network device, such as the network device 110 shown in FIG. 1 ; the communication system 100 may also include at least one terminal device, such as the terminal device 120 shown in FIG. 1 , such as the terminal device 130 shown in FIG. 1 , wherein a sounding reference signal (SRS) is detected.
- the network device 110 may communicate with the terminal device 120 and the terminal device 130 via a wireless link.
- SRS sounding reference signal
- Each communication device such as the network device 110, the terminal device 120 or the terminal device 130, may be configured with multiple antennas.
- the configured multiple antennas may include at least one transmitting antenna for sending signals and at least one receiving antenna for receiving signals. Therefore, the communication devices in the communication system 100, such as the network device 110 and the terminal device 120, can communicate through the multi-antenna technology; and the network device 110 and the terminal device 130 can communicate through the multi-antenna technology.
- FIG1 is an example of communication between a network device and a terminal device, which simply illustrates a communication scenario to which the present application can be applied, and different antenna ports implement code domain resource reuse through cyclic shift (CS).
- the scenario in FIG1 is an exemplary description and does not limit other scenarios to which the present application can be applied.
- FIG. 1 is only a simplified schematic diagram for ease of understanding, and the communication system 100 may also include other network devices or other terminal devices, which are not shown in FIG. 1 .
- the reference signal may also be referred to as a pilot or a reference sequence, etc.
- the reference signal may be a reference signal for channel measurement.
- the reference signal may be an SRS for uplink channel measurement.
- the reference signal may be a pilot for uplink channel measurement.
- the reference signal may be an SRS for positioning measurement.
- the reference signals listed above are only examples and should not constitute any limitation to the present application. The present application does not exclude the possibility of defining other reference signals in future protocols to achieve the same or similar functions, nor does it exclude the possibility of defining other reference signals in future protocols to achieve different functions.
- SRS is used to estimate the channel quality of different frequency bands.
- SRS is an uplink reference signal sent by a terminal device to an access network device (such as a base station).
- the access network device obtains the UL channel of the terminal device based on the SRS sent by the terminal device.
- the access network device obtains the DL channel of the terminal device based on channel reciprocity, thereby scheduling data for the terminal device based on the DL channel.
- the UE and/or user in the following description can be regarded as a terminal device.
- Cyclic shift In SRS resources, CS is used to distinguish different code domain resources. SRS resources implement code division multiplexing between ports by assigning different CS to different ports. Specifically, cyclic shift acts on the transmission sequence. Due to the characteristics of the transmission sequence, applying cyclic shift to the transmission sequence is equivalent to shifting the signal in the delay domain. When different signals have different shifts, the multiplexing effect is achieved.
- different SRS sequences are distinguished by different CSs, and the SRS sequences corresponding to different CSs are orthogonal, ⁇ is the cyclic shift, and j is the imaginary unit.
- SRS resource i.e., SRS resource
- the time domain resources may be time units such as symbols, subframes, and time slots
- the frequency domain resources may refer to frequency domain positions such as subcarriers, RBs, REs, or RGs
- the spatial domain resources may refer to spatial domains such as antenna ports or codewords.
- SRS resources are configured by radio resource control (RRC) IE SRS-Resource or SRS-PosResource, where SRS-PosResource is used for positioning scenarios.
- RRC radio resource control
- the same terminal can activate at most one SRS resource set at the same time.
- An SRS resource set can contain one or more SRS resources. Multiple SRS resources are distinguished by resource IDs. Different terminal devices configure SRS resources differently.
- SRS and SRS resource one SRS is sent on one SRS resource, one SRS corresponds to one or more antenna ports, and each antenna port corresponds to an SRS sequence. In other words, one SRS corresponds to one or more SRS sequences, which are sent on different antenna ports.
- the corresponding SRS sequence is:
- the cyclic shift value ⁇ i of the CS corresponding to antenna port p i is
- p i can be understood as the serial number of antenna port i
- the corresponding configuration parameters are included in the RRC parameter transmissionComb, which corresponds to the maximum number of CSs in the MIMO scenario. As indicated in Table 1 below.
- SRS resources are semi-statically configured by access network equipment (e.g., base stations) through high-level parameters, including:
- Each SRS port corresponds to a specific time-frequency code resource. Ideally, each SRS port is orthogonal. Each SRS port corresponds to a physical antenna or a virtual antenna of a terminal device.
- SRS comb The frequency domain subcarriers on the comb teeth of an SRS are equally spaced, and the number of comb teeth K TC ⁇ 2,4,8 ⁇ is semi-statically configured by the access network device (the base station is taken as an example below) through high-level parameters, which determines the number of comb teeth contained in the SRS transmission bandwidth.
- Figure 2 is an example of a comb with three different numbers of comb teeth provided in this application.
- each grid represents a resource element (RE), and the black grid is an example of the RE position occupied by a comb with different numbers of comb teeth.
- One SRS transmission corresponds to R consecutive orthogonal frequency division multiplexing (OFDM) symbols within an SRS resource.
- the repetition factor R ⁇ 1,2,4 ⁇ is semi-statically configured by the base station through the high-level parameter repetitionFactor.
- SRS transmission bandwidth, frequency hopping bandwidth and frequency hopping period The transmission bandwidth, frequency hopping bandwidth and frequency hopping period of SRS are determined according to high-level parameters and protocol predefined tables.
- the SRS transmission bandwidth is the bandwidth range corresponding to the channel obtained by the base station according to the SRS
- the SRS frequency hopping bandwidth is the bandwidth range corresponding to the channel obtained by the base station after a single SRS transmission
- the frequency hopping bandwidth is less than or equal to the scanning bandwidth
- the frequency hopping period is the number of SRS transmissions required for the base station to obtain the channel corresponding to the transmission bandwidth
- the base station configures the frequency scaling factor PF through high-level parameters
- the transmission bandwidth, frequency hopping bandwidth and frequency hopping period of SRS remain unchanged, but because the bandwidth of a single SRS transmission becomes the original 1/ PF , in this case, the transmission bandwidth is PF times the bandwidth range corresponding to the channel obtained by the base station according to the SRS, and the SRS frequency hopping
- FIG 3 is an example of a transmission bandwidth and frequency hopping bandwidth provided in an embodiment of the present application.
- each grid represents a resource block (RB) in the frequency domain
- the SRS bandwidth is 16 RB
- the frequency hopping bandwidth is 4 RB
- the frequency hopping period is 4.
- (a) in FIG3 corresponds to no PF configuration
- Pseudo-random sequence An example of a pseudo-random sequence:
- N c 1600
- the second M sequence x 2 (n) is initialized as: C init is the initialization parameter.
- FIG. 4 shows a schematic diagram of a scenario of joint transmission of multiple network devices.
- the network devices are TRP1 and TRP2, and the terminal devices are UE1 and UE2.
- TRP1 and TRP2 serve UE1 together and send data to UE1. Therefore, TRP1 and TRP2 need to obtain the channels from UE1 to TRP1 and TRP2 in advance.
- SRS resource 1 SRS resource 1
- UE1 sends an SRS signal on SRS resource 1
- TRP1 and TRP2 both receive the SRS signal from UE1 on this resource, thereby obtaining their respective channels.
- TRP1 and TRP2 also serve UE2 together. Similar to serving UE1, TRP1 and TRP2 need to obtain the channels from UE2 to TRP1 and TRP2 in advance.
- SRS resource 2 By configuring an SRS resource (SRS resource 2), UE2 sends an SRS signal on SRS resource 2, and TRP1 and TRP2 both receive the SRS signal from UE2 on this resource, thereby obtaining their respective channels. It can be seen that for a UE, only one SRS resource is needed to enable multiple TRPs to simultaneously acquire the channel of the UE. In order to serve UE1 and UE2 at the same time, SRS1 and SRS2 are usually configured with the same base sequence and occupy different frequency domain/code domain resources to maintain orthogonality.
- the delays of the SRS signal sent by the UE to different TRPs are also different, that is, ⁇ 1,1 ⁇ 1,2 , ⁇ 2,1 ⁇ 2,2 , where ⁇ i,j represents the delay from UEi to TRPj.
- the sequence elements i.e., the elements in the SRS sequence
- the above base sequence It can be a sequence generated by a Zadoff-Chu (ZC) sequence, such as the ZC sequence itself, or a sequence generated by expanding or truncating the ZC sequence by cyclic shift.
- ZC Zadoff-Chu
- a ZC sequence of length N can be expressed as follows:
- N is a positive integer
- q is the root index of the ZC sequence, and is a positive integer that is coprime with N and less than N.
- the cyclic shift ⁇ i corresponding to the SRS port p i is defined as follows:
- Each cyclic shift value corresponds to the starting point of each portion. It is a cyclic shift reference index, which is semi-statically configured by the network device through the high-level parameter transmissionComb.
- FIG5 shows a schematic diagram of SRS distribution in the delay domain.
- the number of ports of SRS1 Maximum number of cyclic shifts
- the starting position of the circular shift value In this configuration, the four ports of SRS1 occupy cyclic shift values 0, 2, 4, and 6 respectively.
- the cluster of vertical lines in the box represents the delay domain channel.
- the cyclic shift values corresponding to two adjacent ports differ by 2.
- the four ports are evenly distributed in the entire delay domain, and the intervals between the cyclic shift values corresponding to adjacent ports are the same. In this way, even if the delay spread of some ports is large, there will be no mutual interference between the ports.
- cyclic shift values 1, 3, 5, and 7 are not occupied.
- network devices usually reallocate these remaining resources to other SRSs.
- SRS2 can be configured here, and its port number is Maximum number of cyclic shifts The starting position of the circular shift value At this time, the four ports of SRS resource 2 occupy cyclic shift values 1, 3, 5, and 7 respectively, and the cyclic shift values corresponding to two adjacent ports differ by 2.
- SRS1 and SRS2 each ensure that their ports are evenly distributed in the entire delay domain, and in general, the ports of SRS1 and SRS2 are staggered in the entire delay domain.
- the cyclic shift value corresponding to the port is currently randomized. Specifically, at different SRS transmission times, the cyclic shift value corresponding to the SRS port is in the set Randomly selected from .
- the cyclic shift values corresponding to the 4 ports of the SRS resource correspond to 0, 3, 6, and 9, respectively, as shown in (a) of Figure 6, and at the second SRS transmission time (time 2), the cyclic shift values corresponding to the 4 ports of the SRS resource correspond to 1, 4, 7, and 10, respectively, as shown in (b) of Figure 6.
- the advantage of this is that when the cyclic shift of the interference signal of the neighboring cell (cell 2) remains unchanged, as shown in (c) of Figure 6, the cyclic shift value corresponding to the port of the SRS of the current cell (cell 1) is constantly changed to achieve the effect of interference randomization.
- UE1 is aligned with TRP1, that is, the delay from UE1 to TRP1 is 0, while there is a delay from UE1 to TRP2.
- UE2 is aligned with TRP2, that is, the delay from UE2 to TRP2 is 0, while there is a delay from UE2 to TRP1.
- the delay domain signal received by TRP1 is as shown in (b) of Figure 7. Since there is a delay from UE2 to TRP1, in the delay domain, UE2's channel will rotate to the right. Ring offset.
- the delay domain signal received by TRP2 is shown in (c) of FIG7 . Since there is a delay from UE1 to TRP2, in the delay domain, the channel of UE1 will be cyclically shifted to the right and overlap with the channel of UE2, causing interference.
- the cyclic shift value corresponding to the SRS port is in the set of all available cyclic shift values. Such randomization may cause the SRS signals received by TRP1 to interfere with each other in some cases. For example, when the cyclic shift values corresponding to the ports of SRS1 are 0, 3, 6, 9, and the cyclic shift values corresponding to the ports of SRS2 are also 0, 3, 6, 9, the signals received by TRP1 may collide, as shown in FIG8 .
- the present application provides a communication method to achieve orthogonality between SRS sequences.
- the embodiments shown below do not particularly limit the specific structure of the execution subject of the method provided in the embodiments of the present application.
- the execution subject of the method provided in the embodiments of the present application may be a terminal device or an access network device, or a functional module in the terminal device or the access device that can call and execute the program.
- the number of antenna ports for an SRS configuration is configured by the higher-level parameter nrofSRS-Ports. Otherwise, the number of antenna ports is 1.
- the maximum cyclic shift number defined in the current protocol corresponds to K TC .
- the cyclic shift value offset is used to determine the cyclic shift.
- L randomization interval length, which indicates the length of the sub-interval contained in the value range of the cyclic shift value bias.
- the length of the sub-interval is the absolute value of the difference between the left and right endpoints of the sub-interval.
- K Circular shift bias value granularity
- K represents the number of cyclic shift bias values within a unit length.
- the length of the interval [0,2] is two unit lengths.
- Randomization direction used to determine the positive or negative bias of the cyclic shift value.
- ⁇ a first value, determined according to the SRS sending time and the pseudo-random sequence.
- ⁇ a second value, determined according to the SRS sending time and the pseudo-random sequence.
- interval interval which indicates the minimum interval between two sub-intervals in the cyclic shift value range.
- the interval between sub-intervals is the absolute value of the difference between the left endpoints of the sub-intervals.
- the information enabled by the information is called information to be enabled.
- the information to be enabled can be directly enabled, such as the information to be enabled itself or the index of the information to be enabled.
- the information to be enabled can also be indirectly enabled by enabling other information, wherein there is an association relationship between the other information and the information to be enabled. It is also possible to enable only a part of the information to be enabled, while the other parts of the information to be enabled are known or agreed in advance.
- the enabling of specific information can also be achieved by means of the arrangement order of each piece of information agreed in advance (such as specified by the protocol), thereby reducing the enabling overhead to a certain extent.
- the common parts of each piece of information can also be identified and enabled uniformly to reduce the enabling overhead caused by enabling the same information separately.
- the first, second and various numerical numbers (e.g., "#1", “#2”, etc.) shown in the present application are only for convenience of description and are used to distinguish objects, and are not used to limit the scope of the embodiments of the present application. For example, to distinguish different SRSs, etc., rather than to describe a specific order or sequence. It should be understood that the objects described in this way can be interchangeable where appropriate so as to be able to describe solutions other than the embodiments of the present application.
- pre-set may include pre-definition, for example, protocol definition.
- pre-definition can be implemented by pre-saving corresponding codes, tables or other methods that can be used to indicate relevant information in a device (for example, including user equipment or core network equipment), and this application does not limit its specific implementation method.
- the "storage” involved in the embodiments of the present application may refer to storage in one or more memories.
- the one or more memories may be separately set or integrated in an encoder or decoder, a processor, or a communication device.
- the one or more memories may also be partially separately set and partially integrated in a decoder, a processor, or a communication device.
- the type of memory may be any form of storage medium, which is not limited by the present application.
- the "protocol” involved in the embodiments of the present application may refer to a standard protocol in the communication field, for example, it may include a 5G protocol, a new radio (NR) protocol, and related protocols used in future communication systems, and the present application does not limit this.
- a standard protocol in the communication field for example, it may include a 5G protocol, a new radio (NR) protocol, and related protocols used in future communication systems, and the present application does not limit this.
- the network device mentioned below may be one of the multiple network devices in a multi-network device multi-terminal device joint transmission scenario
- the terminal device mentioned below may be one of the multiple terminal devices in a multi-network device multi-terminal device joint transmission scenario.
- Figure 9 shows a schematic diagram of a communication method. This method can reduce interference between different SRSs and improve the accuracy of acquiring channel status.
- the method may include the following steps:
- S910 The network device determines SRS resources.
- the SRS resource corresponds to N ports, and each of the N ports corresponds to a cyclic shift CS.
- the CSs corresponding to the N ports may be the same or different.
- the so-called same may be understood as the CSs corresponding to the N ports are exactly the same.
- the so-called different may be understood as the CSs corresponding to at least two of the N ports are different, or the CSs corresponding to the N ports are different.
- SRS resources can be found in the previous description and will not be repeated here.
- the network device sends the configuration information of the SRS resource to the terminal device, and correspondingly, the terminal device receives the configuration information of the SRS resource.
- the configuration information of the SRS resource is used to configure the SRS resource.
- the configuration information of the SRS resource indicates a cyclic shift so that the terminal device can determine the SRS resource.
- the configuration information of the SRS resources may indicate the cyclic shifts corresponding to the N ports respectively, so that the terminal device determines the SRS resources corresponding to the N ports respectively according to the cyclic shifts corresponding to the N ports respectively.
- the configuration information of the SRS resource may indicate relevant parameters for determining the cyclic shift, so that the terminal device determines the cyclic shifts corresponding to the N ports respectively according to these parameters, and further determines the SRS resources corresponding to the N ports respectively.
- the configuration information of the SRS resource indicates the SRS resources corresponding to the N ports.
- the terminal device determines the cyclic shift corresponding to the first port according to the cyclic shift reference index, the index of the first port and the cyclic shift value offset corresponding to the first port.
- the configuration information of the SRS resource indicates relevant parameters for determining the cyclic shift.
- the first port is one of the above N ports.
- the relevant parameters may be: a cyclic shift reference index corresponding to the first port, an index of the first port, and a cyclic shift value offset corresponding to the first port.
- the cyclic shift corresponding to the first port is associated with the cyclic shift reference index corresponding to the first port, the index of the first port, and the cyclic shift value offset corresponding to the first port.
- the terminal device can determine the initial cyclic shift value corresponding to the first port based on the index of the first port and the cyclic shift reference index corresponding to the first port, and then determine the cyclic shift corresponding to the first port based on the initial cyclic shift value corresponding to the first port and the cyclic shift value offset corresponding to the first port.
- the terminal device directly determines the cyclic shift corresponding to the first port according to the index of the first port, the cyclic shift reference index corresponding to the first port, and the cyclic shift value offset corresponding to the first port.
- the cyclic shift value offset corresponding to the first port is determined according to the transmission time of the SRS and/or the comb offset value of the first port, and the sub-interval length.
- the definitions of the cyclic shift value offset and the sub-interval length can refer to the above description and will not be repeated.
- the cyclic shift offset corresponding to the first port belongs to a first value range, and the first value range is a sub-interval or a union of multiple non-overlapping sub-intervals.
- the first value range includes only one sub-interval, the length of which is 2, and the cyclic shift offset corresponding to the first port is selected from the sub-interval with a length of 2.
- the first value range includes multiple sub-intervals, and the multiple sub-intervals are continuous.
- the first value range includes 3 sub-intervals, and the 3 sub-intervals are sub-interval 1, sub-interval 2, and sub-interval 3.
- the right endpoint of sub-interval 1 coincides with the left endpoint of sub-interval 2
- the right endpoint of sub-interval 2 coincides with the left endpoint of sub-interval 3.
- the 3 sub-intervals can also be regarded as a sub-interval 1, sub-interval 2, and sub-interval 3.
- the first value range includes multiple sub-intervals, and the multiple sub-intervals are continuous.
- the first value range includes 3 sub-intervals, and the 3 sub-intervals are sub-interval 1, sub-interval 2, and sub-interval 3.
- the right endpoint of sub-interval 1 does not overlap with the left endpoint of sub-interval 2
- the right endpoint of sub-interval 2 does not overlap with the left endpoint of sub-interval 3. That is, there is a gap between sub-interval 1 and sub-interval 2, and there is a gap between sub-interval 2 and sub-interval 3.
- the first value range includes multiple sub-intervals, and there are gaps between the multiple sub-intervals, or the multiple sub-intervals are not continuous.
- the cyclic shift corresponding to the first port satisfies the following relationship:
- the cyclic shift value is biased according to different situations in which the first value range contains subintervals.
- the first value range contains subintervals.
- Case 1 The number of sub-intervals included in the first value range is 1.
- the resource configuration information of the SRS indicates the first interval length L, where L may be the length of the sub-interval included in the first value range, that is, the length of the sub-interval included in the first value range.
- the cyclic shift value offset corresponding to the first port satisfies the following relationship:
- the configuration information of the SRS resource further indicates the granularity K of the cyclic shift bias value corresponding to the first port
- the cyclic shift value offset corresponding to the first port satisfies the following relationship:
- ⁇ is a first value, and the first value is determined according to the SRS transmission time and the pseudo-random sequence.
- the pseudo-random sequence can refer to the above description and will not be described in detail.
- the interval length L ranges from
- c(i) is a pseudo-random sequence, or Initialize, Indicates the ID of the cell, Indicates the ID of the SRS.
- c init may be determined according to a high-level parameter.
- T is a time unit, which can be
- l 0 represents the starting OFDM symbol position in a slot corresponding to the first time unit.
- l′ represents the OFDM symbol position corresponding to the first time unit relative to l 0 ,
- R is the number of repeated transmissions, or the repetition factor, which is the number of times in the time domain the same signal is sent.
- the configuration information of the SRS resource may also indicate a first direction b, which is used to determine the positive or negative sign of the cyclic shift value offset corresponding to the first port.
- the first direction is used to determine whether the final cyclic shift is larger or smaller than the initial cyclic shift value.
- the cyclic shift value offset corresponding to the first port satisfies the following relationship:
- the value of b can be 1 or 0.
- the configuration information of the SRS resource further indicates the granularity K of the cyclic shift bias value corresponding to the first port
- the interval length L ranges from
- the cyclic shift value offset corresponding to the first port satisfies the following relationship:
- the interval length L ranges from
- the resource configuration information of the SRS indicates the interval length L1 (second interval length) and the interval length L2 (third interval length).
- the sum of the interval length L1 and the interval length L2 is the length of the sub-interval of the first value range.
- the length of the subinterval included in the first value range is represented by two length parameters.
- the cyclic shift value offset corresponding to the first port satisfies the following relationship:
- ⁇ is a first value determined according to the SRS transmission time and the pseudo-random sequence
- ⁇ is a second value determined according to the SRS transmission time and the pseudo-random sequence.
- the pseudo-random sequence can refer to the above description and will not be repeated here.
- the configuration information of the SRS resource further indicates the granularity K of the cyclic shift bias value corresponding to the first port
- interval lengths L1 and L2 are in the range
- L1 value range is
- L2 value range is
- Case 2 The number of sub-intervals included in the first value range is greater than 1.
- the first value range includes two or more sub-intervals.
- the configuration information of the SRS resource indicates the length and interval of the first sub-interval, the interval interval represents the absolute value of the difference between the minimum values of the values contained in two adjacent sub-intervals within the first value range, and the first sub-interval is one of the two or more sub-intervals.
- adjacent refers to two sub-intervals on the left and right sides of the interval, rather than two sub-intervals whose endpoints overlap.
- the cyclic shift value offset corresponding to the first port satisfies the following relationship:
- ⁇ is the cyclic shift value offset corresponding to the first port
- ⁇ is a first value
- the first value is determined according to the sending time of the SRS and the pseudo-random sequence
- L3 is the length of the first sub-interval
- ⁇ is the interval.
- the configuration information of the SRS resource further indicates the granularity K of the cyclic shift bias value corresponding to the first port
- the interval length L3 ranges from
- the cyclic shift value offset corresponding to the first port satisfies the following relationship:
- the configuration information of the SRS resource may also indicate a first direction b.
- the first direction b may be referred to the above description and will not be described in detail.
- the cyclic shift value offset corresponding to the first port satisfies the following relationship:
- the interval length L3 ranges from
- the configuration information of the SRS resource also indicates a granularity K of a cyclic shift bias value corresponding to the first port.
- the cyclic shift value offset corresponding to the first port satisfies the following relationship:
- the value range of K is ⁇ 1, 2, 4 ⁇ .
- the value range of L is
- the cyclic shift value offset corresponding to the first port satisfies the following relationship:
- the is the initial cyclic shift value corresponding to the first port, is the maximum cyclic shift value, is the cyclic shift reference index corresponding to the first port, is the value of N, the pi is the index of the first port, the A cyclic shift value offset corresponding to the first port.
- the specific formula for determining the initial cyclic shift value corresponding to the first port is determined according to a preset condition.
- the initial cyclic shift value corresponding to the first port is:
- the initial cyclic shift value corresponding to the first port is:
- the SRS resources of UE1 and UE2 both include 4 ports, and the corresponding cyclic shift values are 0, 3, 6, 9 and 1, 4, 7, 10 respectively.
- the granularity K of the cyclic shift bias value is configured as 2
- the interval length L is configured as 3 (the randomized interval is from the starting position to the position of 1 CS grid to the left).
- one grid represents one CS, and there are 12 CSs in total.
- the granularity K is configured as 2
- one grid in the figure is divided into two values, for example, CS0 includes the values 0 and 0.5.
- the minimum value can only be -2. Taking the SRS occupying CS2 in (a) of Figure 10 as an example, the position of the SRS is offset to CS1 at most, and will not be offset to CS0. Therefore, it will not cause the SRS signal received by TRP1 to collide.
- This method avoids the possibility of collision of SRS signals that originally did not collide due to randomization by limiting the random range of cyclic shift.
- the cyclic shift value offset corresponding to the first port satisfies the following relationship:
- UE1 corresponds to SRS1
- UE2 corresponds to SRS2
- the corresponding cyclic shift values are 1, 4, 7, and 10.
- the UE2 cyclic shift bias value granularity K is configured to 2
- the interval lengths L1 and L2 are both configured to 2 (in this case, the randomized interval is from the CS position 0.5 grids to the left of the starting position to the position 0.5 grids to the right of the starting position).
- This method can increase the effective range of SRS signal randomization and enhance communication performance.
- the cyclic shift value offset corresponding to the first port satisfies the following relationship:
- the value range of K is ⁇ 1, 2, 4 ⁇ .
- the value range of L3 is
- the cyclic shift value offset corresponding to the first port satisfies the following relationship:
- the value range of K is ⁇ 1, 2, 4 ⁇ .
- the SRS resource of UE1 includes 4 ports, UE1 corresponds to SRS1, and the corresponding cyclic shift values are 0, 3, 6, and 9; UE2 corresponds to SRS2, and the corresponding cyclic shift values are 1, 4, 7, and 10.
- UE3 corresponds to SRS3, and the corresponding cyclic shift values are 1, 4, 7, and 10.
- UE3 is not shown in the figure.
- UE1 corresponds to SRS1
- the corresponding cyclic shift values are 0, 3, 6, and 9
- UE2 corresponds to SRS2
- the corresponding cyclic shift values are 1, 4, 7, and 10.
- UE3 corresponds to SRS3, and the corresponding cyclic shift values are 1, 4, 7, and 10.
- UE3 is not shown in the figure.
- the cyclic shift bias value granularity K of UE1 is configured as 1
- the interval length L3 is configured as 2
- the interval interval ⁇ 3.
- the value range is: ⁇ 0, 1, 3, 4, 6, 7, 9, 10 ⁇ .
- the range of port cyclic shift randomization is expanded, so that the cyclic shift corresponding to each port of the SRS signal changes within a discrete set range over time, which enables the port to face different interference at different times, further improving the interference randomization performance.
- ⁇ i is the cyclic shift corresponding to the first port, is the initial cyclic shift value corresponding to the first port, is the maximum cyclic shift value, is the cyclic shift reference index corresponding to the first port, is the value of N, the pi is the index of the first port, the is the cyclic shift value offset corresponding to the first port.
- the preset condition is
- ⁇ i is the cyclic shift corresponding to the first port, is the initial cyclic shift value corresponding to the first port, is the maximum cyclic shift value, is the cyclic shift reference index corresponding to the first port, is the value of N, the pi is the index of the first port, the is the cyclic shift value offset corresponding to the first port, and L is the length of the sub-interval.
- the preset condition is the following condition:
- the cyclic shift corresponding to the first port is related to K.
- the cyclic shift corresponding to the first port satisfies the following relationship:
- ⁇ i is the cyclic shift corresponding to the first port, is the initial cyclic shift value corresponding to the first port, is the maximum cyclic shift value, is the cyclic shift reference index corresponding to the first port, is the value of N, the pi is the index of the first port, the is the cyclic shift value offset corresponding to the first port, and K is the first value granularity.
- the preset condition is the following condition:
- ⁇ i is the cyclic shift corresponding to the first port, is the initial cyclic shift value corresponding to the first port, is the maximum cyclic shift value, is the cyclic shift reference index corresponding to the first port, is the value of N, the pi is the index of the first port, the is the cyclic shift value offset corresponding to the first port, K is the first value granularity, and L is the sub-interval length.
- the preset condition is the cyclic shift corresponding to the first port, is the initial cyclic shift value corresponding to the first port, is the maximum cyclic shift value, is the cyclic shift reference index corresponding to the first port, is the value of N, the pi is the index of the first port, the is the cyclic shift value offset corresponding to the first port, K is the first value granularity, and L is the sub-interval length.
- the preset condition is
- the SRS resources of UE1 and UE2 both include 4 ports, and the corresponding cyclic shift values are 0, 3, 6, 9 and 1, 4, 7, 10 respectively.
- UE1 does not support randomization, that is, the four ports of SRS corresponding to UE1 always occupy CS0, 3, 6, and 9; UE2 can avoid collision with UE by adopting the proposed randomization scheme.
- the sub-interval length corresponding to UE2 is set to 2.
- one grid represents one CS, and there are 12 CSs in total.
- the value range is ⁇ 0, 1 ⁇ .
- TRP2 receives different signals (SRS1 and SRS2), and UE1 and UE2 will not collide at this time.
- the SRS resources of UE1 and UE2 both include 4 ports, and the corresponding cyclic shift values are 0, 3, 6, 9 and 1, 4, 7, 10 respectively.
- UE1 does not support randomization, that is, the four ports of SRS corresponding to UE1 always occupy CS0, 3, 6, and 9; UE2 can avoid collision with UE by adopting the proposed randomization scheme.
- the sub-interval length L corresponding to UE2 is set to 2, and the interval interval is set to 3.
- one grid represents one CS, and there are 12 CSs in total.
- the value range is ⁇ 0, 1, 3, 4, 6, 7, 9, 10 ⁇
- TRP2 receives different signals (SRS1 and SRS2), and UE1 and UE2 will not collide at this time.
- the SRS resources of UE1 and UE2 both include 4 ports, and the corresponding cyclic shift values are: 0, 3, 6, 9 and 1, 4, 7, 10 respectively.
- UE1 does not support randomization, that is, the four ports of SRS corresponding to UE1 always occupy CS0, 3, 6, and 9; UE2 can avoid collision with UE by adopting the proposed randomization scheme.
- the sub-interval length corresponding to UE2 is set to 2
- the value granularity K is set to 2.
- one grid represents one CS, and there are 12 CSs in total.
- the value range is ⁇ 0, 0.5, 1, 1.5 ⁇
- TRP2 receives different signals (SRS1 and SRS2), and UE1 and UE2 will not collide at this time.
- the solution improves the position where UE2 can jump while ensuring that UE1 and UE2 do not collide, thereby increasing the randomization gain.
- the SRS resources of UE1 and UE2 both include 4 ports, and the corresponding cyclic shift values are: 0, 3, 6, 9 and 1, 4, 7, 10 respectively.
- UE1 does not support randomization, that is, the four ports of SRS corresponding to UE1 always occupy CS0, 3, 6, and 9; UE2 can avoid collision with UE by adopting the proposed randomization scheme.
- the sub-interval length corresponding to UE2 is set to 3
- the value granularity K is set to 2.
- one grid represents one CS, and there are 12 CSs in total.
- the value range is ⁇ 0, 0.5, 1 ⁇
- TRP2 receives different signals (SRS1 and SRS2), and UE1 and UE2 will not collide at this time.
- the solution improves the position where UE2 can jump while ensuring that UE1 and UE2 do not collide, thereby increasing the randomization gain.
- the SRS resources of UE1 and UE2 both include 4 ports, and the corresponding cyclic shift values are 0, 3, 6, 9 and 1, 4, 7, 10 respectively.
- UE1 does not support randomization, that is, the four ports of SRS corresponding to UE1 always occupy CS0, 3, 6, and 9; UE2 can avoid collision with UE by adopting the proposed randomization scheme.
- the sub-interval length L3 corresponding to UE2 is set to 2
- the interval interval is set to 3
- the value granularity is set to 2.
- one grid represents one CS, and there are 12 CSs in total.
- the value range is ⁇ 0, 0.5, 1, 1.5, 3, 3.5, 4, 4.5, 6, 6.5, 7, 7.5, 9, 9.5, 10, 10.5 ⁇
- TRP2 receives different signals (SRS1 and SRS2), and UE1 and UE2 will not collide at this time.
- the SRS resources of UE1 and UE2 both include 4 ports, and the corresponding cyclic shift values are 0, 3, 6, 9 and 1, 4, 7, 10 respectively.
- UE1 does not support randomization, that is, the four ports of SRS corresponding to UE1 always occupy CS0, 3, 6, and 9; UE2 can avoid collision with UE by adopting the proposed randomization scheme.
- the sub-interval length L3 corresponding to UE2 is set to 4, the interval is set to 3, and the value granularity is set to 2.
- one grid represents one CS, and there are 12 CSs in total.
- the value range is ⁇ 0, 0.5, 1, 1.5, 3, 3.5, 4, 4.5, 6, 6.5, 7, 7.5, 9, 9.5, 10, 10.5 ⁇
- TRP2 receives different signals (SRS1 and SRS2), and UE1 and UE2 will not collide at this time.
- the SRS resources of UE1 and UE2 both include 4 ports, and the corresponding cyclic shift values are 0, 3, 6, 9 and 1, 4, 7, 10 respectively.
- UE1 does not support randomization, that is, the four ports of SRS corresponding to UE1 always occupy CS0, 3, 6, and 9; UE2 can avoid collision with UE by adopting the proposed randomization scheme.
- the sub-interval length corresponding to UE2 is set to 2, and the value granularity is set to 2.
- one grid represents one CS, and there are 12 CSs in total.
- the value range is ⁇ 0, 0.5, 1 ⁇
- TRP2 receives different signals (SRS1 and SRS2), and UE1 and UE2 will not collide at this time.
- the SRS resources of UE1 and UE2 both include 4 ports, and the corresponding cyclic shift values are: 0, 3, 6, 9 and 1, 4, 7, 10 respectively.
- UE1 does not support randomization, that is, the four ports of SRS corresponding to UE1 always occupy CS0, 3, 6, and 9; UE2 can avoid collision with UE by adopting the proposed randomization scheme.
- the sub-interval length corresponding to UE2 is set to 2
- the value granularity is set to 2
- the interval interval is set to 3.
- one grid represents one CS, and there are 12 CSs in total.
- the value range is ⁇ 0, 0.5, 1, 3, 3.5, 4, 6, 6.5, 7, 9, 9.5, 10 ⁇
- TRP2 receives different signals (SRS1 and SRS2), and UE1 and UE2 will not collide at this time.
- subinterval length there are two interpretations of subinterval length: one is the number of elements contained in the subinterval, and the other is the number of integers contained in the subinterval.
- the number of elements in a subinterval may be more than L.
- the number of elements in a subinterval is equal to KL or KL-1 or KL+1.
- the method may further include:
- the terminal device sends an SRS to the network device, and correspondingly, the network device receives the SRS.
- the terminal device sends an SRS to the network device on an SRS resource determined according to the cyclic shift, and correspondingly, the network device receives the SRS on the SRS resource.
- the terminal device here may be a terminal device configured with cyclic shift.
- the terminal device may be any terminal device in the communication system.
- the network device may be any network device in the communication system.
- multiple terminal devices in the communication system can send SRS to multiple network devices.
- UE1 sends SRS1 to TRP1, and correspondingly, TRP1 receives SRS1.
- UE2 sends SRS2 to TRP2, and correspondingly, TRP2 receives SRS2.
- the method may further include the following steps:
- S950 The network device determines a channel state according to the SRS.
- This method refines the design of the randomly selected intervals of the cyclic shift values corresponding to each SRS port. Specifically, the cyclic shift values corresponding to each SRS port will change over time, and the cyclic shift values are randomly selected within a certain interval.
- the network device configures a fine interval of randomly selected cyclic shift values for the terminal device, avoiding the possibility of collision of SRS signals that would not collide, ensuring the orthogonality of SRS, and enabling the network device to obtain accurate channel status, and further perform data scheduling based on the channel status, which can improve communication quality.
- the devices in the existing network architecture are mainly used as examples for exemplary description (such as network devices, terminal devices, etc.), and it should be understood that the specific form of the device is not limited in the embodiments of the present application. For example, devices that can achieve the same function in the future are applicable to the embodiments of the present application.
- the methods and operations implemented by the network device can also be implemented by components that can be used for the network device; the methods and operations implemented by the terminal device can also be implemented by components that can be used for the terminal device.
- the communication method provided by the embodiment of the present application is described in detail above in conjunction with Figures 9 to 12.
- the above communication method is mainly introduced from the perspective of interaction between a network device and a terminal device. It can be understood that the network device and the terminal device, in order to implement the above functions, include hardware structures and/or software modules corresponding to the execution of each function.
- the embodiment of the present application can divide the functional modules of the transmitting end device or the receiving end device according to the above method example.
- each functional module can be divided corresponding to each function, or two or more functions can be integrated into one processing module.
- the above integrated module can be implemented in the form of hardware or in the form of software functional modules. It should be noted that the division of modules in the embodiment of the present application is schematic and is only a logical functional division. There may be other division methods in actual implementation. The following is an example of dividing each functional module corresponding to each function.
- FIG13 is a schematic diagram of a communication device 1300 proposed in the present application. As shown in FIG13 , the device 1300 includes a receiving unit 1310 and a processing unit 1320 .
- the receiving unit 1310 is configured to receive configuration information of SRS resources
- the processing unit 1320 is configured to determine a cyclic shift value offset corresponding to the first port according to the configuration information of the SRS resource.
- the apparatus 1300 corresponds to the terminal device in the method embodiment, and the apparatus 1300 may be the terminal device in the method embodiment, or a chip or functional module inside the terminal device in the method embodiment.
- the corresponding units of the apparatus 1300 are used to execute the corresponding steps executed by the terminal device in the method embodiment shown in FIG. 5 .
- the processing unit 1320 in the device 1300 is used to execute the steps related to the processing corresponding to the terminal device in the method embodiment, for example, executing step S930 in FIG. 9 .
- the receiving unit 1310 in the apparatus 1300 is used to execute the terminal device receiving step in the method embodiment, for example, executing step S920 of receiving the cyclic shift offset value corresponding to the first SRS in FIG5 .
- the apparatus 1300 may further include a sending unit for executing the step of sending by the terminal device in the method embodiment. For example, sending information to other devices.
- the sending unit and the receiving unit 1310 may form a transceiver unit, which has the functions of receiving and sending.
- the processing unit 1320 may be at least one processor.
- the sending unit may be a transmitter or an interface circuit
- the receiving unit 1310 may be a receiver or an interface circuit.
- the receiver and the transmitter may be integrated together to form a transceiver or an interface circuit.
- the sending unit may be configured to send an SRS.
- the device 1300 may also include a storage unit for storing data and/or signaling, and the processing unit 1320, the sending unit, and the receiving unit 1310 may interact or couple with the storage unit, for example, read or call the data and/or signaling in the storage unit, so that the method of the above embodiment is executed.
- a storage unit for storing data and/or signaling
- the processing unit 1320, the sending unit, and the receiving unit 1310 may interact or couple with the storage unit, for example, read or call the data and/or signaling in the storage unit, so that the method of the above embodiment is executed.
- the above units can exist independently or be fully or partially integrated.
- FIG. 14 is a schematic diagram of the structure of a terminal device 1400 applicable to an embodiment of the present application.
- the terminal device 1400 can be applied to the system shown in FIG. 1.
- FIG. 14 only shows the main components of the terminal device.
- the terminal device 1400 includes a processor, a memory, a control circuit, an antenna, and an input/output device.
- the processor is used to control the antenna and the input/output device to send and receive signals
- the memory is used to store a computer program
- the processor is used to call and run the computer program from the memory to execute the corresponding process and/or operation performed by the terminal device in the registration method proposed in the present application. No further details are given here.
- FIG. 14 shows only one memory and processor. In an actual terminal device, there may be multiple processors and memories.
- the memory may also be referred to as a storage medium or a storage device, etc., which is not limited in the embodiments of the present application.
- FIG15 is a schematic diagram of a communication device 1500 proposed in the present application.
- the device 1500 includes a processing unit 1510 and a sending unit 1520 .
- the processing unit 1510 is configured to determine configuration information of SRS resources.
- the processing unit 1510 may also be configured to determine a channel state according to the SRS.
- the sending unit 1520 is configured to send configuration information of SRS resources.
- the apparatus 1500 corresponds to the network device in the method embodiment, and the apparatus 1500 may be the network device in the method embodiment, or a chip or functional module inside the network device in the method embodiment.
- the corresponding units of the apparatus 1500 are used to execute the corresponding steps executed by the network device in the method embodiment shown in FIG. 5 .
- the processing unit 1510 in the apparatus 1500 is used to execute the steps related to the processing inside the network device in the method embodiment, for example, executing S950 in FIG9 .
- the sending unit 1520 in the apparatus 1500 is used to execute steps related to network device sending, for example, executing S920 in FIG. 9 .
- the apparatus 1500 may further include a receiving unit for executing the receiving step of the network device in the method embodiment.
- the receiving unit and the sending unit 1520 may form a transceiver unit, which has the functions of receiving and sending.
- the processing unit 1510 may be at least one processor.
- the sending unit may be a transmitter or an interface circuit.
- the receiving unit may be a receiver or an interface circuit.
- the receiver and the transmitter may be integrated together to form a transceiver or an interface circuit.
- the receiving unit may be configured to receive an SRS.
- the device 1500 may also include a storage unit for storing data and/or signaling, and the processing unit 1510, the sending unit 1520, and the receiving unit may interact or couple with the storage unit, for example, read or call the data and/or signaling in the storage unit, so that the method of the above embodiment is executed.
- a storage unit for storing data and/or signaling
- the processing unit 1510, the sending unit 1520, and the receiving unit may interact or couple with the storage unit, for example, read or call the data and/or signaling in the storage unit, so that the method of the above embodiment is executed.
- the above units can exist independently or be fully or partially integrated.
- Fig. 16 is a schematic diagram of the structure of a network device 1600 applicable to an embodiment of the present application, which can be used to implement the functions of the network device in the above-mentioned method for channel measurement.
- the network device 1600 may include a CU, a DU, and an AAU.
- the access network device in the LTE communication system which is composed of one or more radio frequency units, such as a remote radio unit (RRU) 1601 and one or more base band units (BBU)
- RRU remote radio unit
- BBU base band units
- the non-real-time part of the original BBU will be separated and redefined as a CU, which is responsible for processing non-real-time protocols and services, and part of the physical layer processing functions of the BBU are merged with the original RRU and passive antennas into an AAU, and the remaining functions of the BBU are redefined as a DU, which is responsible for processing physical layer protocols and real-time services.
- CU and DU are distinguished by the real-time nature of the processing content
- AAU is a combination of RRU and antenna.
- CU, DU, and AAU can be separated or co-located, so there will be a variety of network deployment forms.
- One possible deployment form is consistent with the traditional 4G access network equipment, and CU and DU are deployed in the same hardware. It should be understood that Figure 16 is only an example and does not limit the scope of protection of this application.
- the deployment form can also be DU deployed in the 5G BBU room, CU centralized deployment or DU centralized deployment, CU higher-level centralized, etc.
- the AAU 1601 can implement the transceiver function and is called the transceiver unit 1601.
- the transceiver unit 1601 can also be called a transceiver, a transceiver circuit, or a transceiver, etc., which may include at least one antenna 16011 and a radio frequency unit 16016.
- the transceiver unit 1601 may include a receiving unit and a transmitting unit, the receiving unit may correspond to a receiver (or receiver, receiving circuit), and the transmitting unit may correspond to a transmitter (or transmitter, transmitting circuit).
- the CU and DU 1602 can implement internal processing functions and be called a processing unit 1602.
- the processing unit 1602 can control the access network device, etc., and can be called a controller.
- the AAU 1601 and the CU and DU 1602 may be physically arranged together or physically separated.
- the access network equipment is not limited to the form shown in FIG. 16 , but may be in other forms: for example, including BBU and ARU, or including BBU and AAU; it may also be CPE, or may be in other forms, which are not limited in the present application.
- the network device 1600 shown in FIG. 16 can implement the network device involved in the method embodiment of FIG. 5.
- the operations and/or functions of each unit in the network device 1600 are respectively to implement the corresponding processes executed by the network device in the method embodiment of the present application. Repeatedly, detailed description is appropriately omitted here.
- the structure of the network device illustrated in FIG16 is only a possible form and should not constitute any limitation to the embodiments of the present application. The present application does not exclude the possibility of other forms of network device structures that may appear in the future.
- An embodiment of the present application also provides a communication system, which includes the aforementioned terminal device and network device.
- the present application also provides a computer-readable storage medium, in which instructions are stored.
- the instructions When the instructions are executed on a computer, the computer executes each step executed by the terminal device in the method shown in FIG. 9 .
- the present application also provides a computer-readable storage medium, in which instructions are stored.
- the instructions When the instructions are executed on a computer, the computer executes each step executed by the network device in the method shown in FIG. 9 .
- the present application also provides a computer program product including instructions.
- the computer program product is run on a computer, the computer is enabled to execute each step executed by the terminal device in the method shown in FIG. 9 .
- the present application also provides a computer program product comprising instructions.
- the computer program product is run on a computer, the computer is enabled to execute each step executed by the network device in the method shown in FIG. 9 .
- the present application also provides a chip, including a processor.
- the processor is used to read and run a computer program stored in a memory to execute the corresponding operations and/or processes performed by a terminal device in the method for channel measurement provided by the present application.
- the chip also includes a memory, which is connected to the processor through a circuit or wire, and the processor is used to read and execute the computer program in the memory.
- the chip also includes a communication interface, and the processor is connected to the communication interface.
- the communication interface is used to receive processed data and/or information, and the processor obtains the data and/or information from the communication interface and processes the data and/or information.
- the communication interface can be an input/output interface, an interface circuit, an output circuit, an input circuit, a pin or a related circuit on the chip.
- the processor can also be embodied as a processing circuit or a logic circuit.
- the present application also provides a chip, including a processor.
- the processor is used to read and run a computer program stored in a memory to execute the corresponding operations and/or processes performed by a network device in the method for channel measurement provided by the present application.
- the chip also includes a memory, which is connected to the processor through a circuit or wire, and the processor is used to read and execute the computer program in the memory.
- the chip also includes a communication interface, and the processor is connected to the communication interface.
- the communication interface is used to receive processed data and/or information, and the processor obtains the data and/or information from the communication interface and processes the data and/or information.
- the communication interface can be an input/output interface, an interface circuit, an output circuit, an input circuit, a pin or a related circuit on the chip.
- the processor can also be embodied as a processing circuit or a logic circuit.
- the above-mentioned chip can also be replaced by a chip system, which will not be described here.
- the disclosed systems, devices and methods can be implemented in other ways.
- the device embodiments described above are only schematic.
- the division of the units is only a logical function division. There may be other division methods in actual implementation, such as multiple units or components can be combined or integrated into another system, or some features can be ignored or not executed.
- Another point is that the mutual coupling or direct coupling or communication connection shown or discussed can be through some interfaces, indirect coupling or communication connection of devices or units, which can be electrical, mechanical or other forms.
- the units described as separate components may or may not be physically separated, and the components shown as units may or may not be physical units, that is, they may be located in one place or distributed on multiple network units. Some or all of the units may be selected according to actual conditions to achieve the purpose of the solution of this embodiment.
- each functional unit in each embodiment of the present application may be integrated into one processing unit, or each unit may exist physically separately, or two or more units may be integrated into one unit.
- the functions are implemented in the form of software functional units and sold or used as independent products, they can be stored in a computer-readable storage medium.
- the technical solution of the present application or the part that contributes to the prior art, or the part of the technical solution, can be embodied in the form of a software product, and the computer software product is stored in a storage medium, including
- the instructions are used to enable a computer device (which may be a personal computer, a server, or a network device, etc.) to execute all or part of the steps of the methods described in the various embodiments of the present application.
- the aforementioned storage medium includes: a USB flash drive, a mobile hard disk, a read-only memory (ROM), a random access memory (RAM), a magnetic disk or an optical disk, and other media that can store program codes.
- a and/or B can represent three situations: A exists alone, A and B exist at the same time, and B exists alone.
- the character "/" in this article generally indicates that the associated objects before and after are in an "or” relationship; the term “at least one” in this application can mean “one” and "two or more”.
- at least one of A, B and C can represent seven situations: A exists alone, B exists alone, C exists alone, A and B exist at the same time, A and C exist at the same time, C and B exist at the same time, and A, B and C exist at the same time.
Landscapes
- Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
- Signal Processing (AREA)
- Computer Networks & Wireless Communication (AREA)
- Mobile Radio Communication Systems (AREA)
Abstract
Description
本申请要求于2023年4月07日提交中国国家知识产权局、申请号为202310388919.1、申请名称为“通信方法、装置及系统”的中国专利申请的优先权,本申请要求于2023年5月12日提交中国国家知识产权局、申请号为202310541581.9、申请名称为“通信方法、装置及系统”的中国专利申请的优先权,其全部内容通过引用结合在本申请中。This application claims priority to the Chinese patent application filed with the State Intellectual Property Office of China on April 7, 2023, with application number 202310388919.1 and application name “Communication Methods, Devices and Systems”. This application claims priority to the Chinese patent application filed with the State Intellectual Property Office of China on May 12, 2023, with application number 202310541581.9 and application name “Communication Methods, Devices and Systems”, all contents of which are incorporated by reference into this application.
本申请涉及通信领域,并且更具体地,涉及一种通信方法、装置及系统。The present application relates to the field of communications, and more specifically, to a communication method, device and system.
为了保证网络设备与终端设备之间的通信质量,在数据传输前,网络设备可以根据终端设备发送的探测参考信号(sounding reference signal,SRS)获取该终端设备的上行(uplink,UL)信道状态。或者,网络设备根据信道互易性获取该终端设备的下行(downlink,DL)信道状态,从而对该终端设备执行数据调度。In order to ensure the communication quality between the network device and the terminal device, before data transmission, the network device can obtain the uplink (UL) channel state of the terminal device according to the sounding reference signal (SRS) sent by the terminal device. Alternatively, the network device obtains the downlink (DL) channel state of the terminal device according to channel reciprocity, thereby performing data scheduling for the terminal device.
在多网络设备与多终端设备通信的场景下,同一网络设备需要接收来自多个终端设备的SRS以确定对应的信道状态。目前通过采用不同的循环移位,以避免不同的SRS在空域上的干扰。但是,当前的循环移位是随机选择的,不同的SRS所对应的循环移位存在相同的可能性,也就是说,不同的SRS在空域上存在相撞可能。如何降低不同的SRS之间的干扰,以提升获取信道状态的准确性,是亟待解决的问题。In the scenario where multiple network devices communicate with multiple terminal devices, the same network device needs to receive SRS from multiple terminal devices to determine the corresponding channel status. At present, different cyclic shifts are used to avoid interference between different SRS in the spatial domain. However, the current cyclic shift is randomly selected, and the cyclic shifts corresponding to different SRS have the same possibility, that is, different SRS may collide in the spatial domain. How to reduce the interference between different SRS to improve the accuracy of obtaining channel status is an urgent problem to be solved.
发明内容Summary of the invention
本申请提供一种通信方法、装置及系统,能够降低不同SRS之间的干扰,提升获取信道状态的准确性。The present application provides a communication method, device and system, which can reduce interference between different SRSs and improve the accuracy of acquiring channel status.
第一方面,本申请实施例提供一种通信方法,该方法可以由终端设备执行,或者,也可以由用于终端设备的芯片或电路执行,本申请对此不作限定。为了便于描述,下面以由终端设备执行为例进行说明。In a first aspect, an embodiment of the present application provides a communication method, which can be executed by a terminal device, or can also be executed by a chip or circuit for a terminal device, and the present application does not limit this. For ease of description, the following description is taken as an example of execution by a terminal device.
该方法包括:接收探测参考信号SRS资源的配置信息,所述SRS资源包括N个端口,所述SRS资源的配置信息中包括循环移位参考索引、梳齿偏置值和子区间长度L;根据所述循环移位参考索引、所述第一端口的索引和所述第一端口对应的循环移位值偏置确定第一端口对应的循环移位,所述第一端口为所述N个端口中的一个;其中,所述第一端口对应的循环移位值偏置是根据所述SRS的发送时刻和/或所述第一端口的梳齿偏置值,和所述子区间长度确定的。The method comprises: receiving configuration information of a sounding reference signal SRS resource, wherein the SRS resource comprises N ports, and the configuration information of the SRS resource comprises a cyclic shift reference index, a comb tooth offset value and a sub-interval length L; determining a cyclic shift corresponding to a first port according to the cyclic shift reference index, an index of the first port and a cyclic shift value offset corresponding to the first port, wherein the first port is one of the N ports; wherein the cyclic shift value offset corresponding to the first port is determined according to a sending time of the SRS and/or a comb tooth offset value of the first port, and the sub-interval length.
其中,所述子区间的长度为子区间中所包含的数值的个数,所述数值为整数。The length of the sub-interval is the number of values contained in the sub-interval, and the value is an integer.
该方法细化设计了SRS各端口对应的循环移位值随机选取的区间。具体来说,SRS各端口对应的循环移位值会随时间变化而变化,循环移位值的变化方式是在确定的区间内随机选取。网络设备为终端设备配置了精细的随机选取循环移位值的区间,避免了原本不会碰撞的SRS信号发生碰撞的可能,保证了SRS的正交,使得网络设备能够获取准确的信道状态,进一步根据该信道状态执行数据调度,能够提升通信质量。This method refines the design of the randomly selected intervals of the cyclic shift values corresponding to each SRS port. Specifically, the cyclic shift values corresponding to each SRS port will change over time, and the cyclic shift values are randomly selected within a certain interval. The network device configures a fine interval of randomly selected cyclic shift values for the terminal device, avoiding the possibility of collision of SRS signals that would not collide, ensuring the orthogonality of SRS, and enabling the network device to obtain accurate channel status, and further perform data scheduling based on the channel status, which can improve communication quality.
结合第一方面,在第一方面的某些实现方式中,所述第一端口对应的循环移位值偏置属于第一取值范围,所述第一取值范围为一个子区间,或所述第一取值范围为多个长度为L的子区间。In combination with the first aspect, in certain implementations of the first aspect, the cyclic shift value offset corresponding to the first port belongs to a first value range, the first value range is a sub-interval, or the first value range is multiple sub-intervals of length L.
结合第一方面,在第一方面的某些实现方式中,所述N个端口中的每个端口分别对应的循环移位值偏置相同。In combination with the first aspect, in certain implementations of the first aspect, the cyclic shift value offset corresponding to each port of the N ports is the same.
该方式中,确定了一个循环移位值偏置,该循环移位值偏置可以适用于N个端口,终端设备无需再根据每个端口对应的SRS资源的配置信息分别确定各端口对应的循环移位偏置,降低了终端设备的处理复杂度。In this method, a cyclic shift value offset is determined, and the cyclic shift value offset can be applied to N ports. The terminal device no longer needs to determine the cyclic shift offset corresponding to each port according to the configuration information of the SRS resource corresponding to each port, thereby reducing the processing complexity of the terminal device.
结合第一方面,在第一方面的某些实现方式中,所述第一端口对应的循环移位满足下述关系:
In combination with the first aspect, in some implementations of the first aspect, the cyclic shift corresponding to the first port satisfies the following relationship:
或者,
or,
或者,
or,
或者,
or,
其中,αi为所述第一端口对应的循环移位,所述为所述第一端口对应的初始循环移位值,所述为最大循环移位值,所述为所述第一端口对应的循环移位参考索引,所述为N的取值,所述pi为所述第一端口的索引,所述为所述第一端口对应的循环移位值偏置。Wherein, α i is the cyclic shift corresponding to the first port, is the initial cyclic shift value corresponding to the first port, is the maximum cyclic shift value, is the cyclic shift reference index corresponding to the first port, is the value of N, the pi is the index of the first port, the A cyclic shift value offset corresponding to the first port.
结合第一方面,在第一方面的某些实现方式中,所述第一取值范围包括的子区间数量为1。In combination with the first aspect, in some implementations of the first aspect, the number of sub-intervals included in the first value range is 1.
结合第一方面,在第一方面的某些实现方式中,所述第一端口的循环移位值偏置为整数。In combination with the first aspect, in some implementations of the first aspect, the cyclic shift value bias of the first port is an integer.
结合第一方面,在第一方面的某些实现方式中,所述SRS资源的配置信息指示第一区间长度,所述第一区间长度为所述第一取值范围包括的子区间的长度。In combination with the first aspect, in some implementations of the first aspect, the configuration information of the SRS resource indicates a first interval length, and the first interval length is the length of a sub-interval included in the first value range.
结合第一方面,在第一方面的某些实现方式中,所述第一端口对应的循环移位值偏置是根据第一数值和子区间长度确定的,所述第一数值是根据所述SRS的发送时刻和/或所述第一端口的梳齿偏置值确定的。In combination with the first aspect, in certain implementations of the first aspect, the cyclic shift value offset corresponding to the first port is determined based on a first numerical value and a sub-interval length, and the first numerical value is determined based on a sending time of the SRS and/or a comb tooth offset value of the first port.
结合第一方面,在第一方面的某些实现方式中,所述第一端口对应的循环移位值偏置满足下述关系:In combination with the first aspect, in some implementations of the first aspect, the cyclic shift value offset corresponding to the first port satisfies the following relationship:
或者,
or,
其中,所述为所述第一端口对应的循环移位值偏置,所述δ为第一数值,所述第一数值是根据所述SRS的发送时刻以及伪随机序列确定的,所述L为所述子区间长度。Among them, the is the cyclic shift value offset corresponding to the first port, the δ is a first value, the first value is determined according to the sending time of the SRS and a pseudo-random sequence, and the L is the sub-interval length.
可选的,L的取值范围为 为最大循环移位值。Optional, the value range of L is is the maximum cyclic shift value.
结合第一方面,在第一方面的某些实现方式中,所述第一取值范围包括两个或两个以上所述子区间,任意两个所述子区间在时延域上不重叠。In combination with the first aspect, in some implementations of the first aspect, the first value range includes two or more sub-intervals, and any two of the sub-intervals do not overlap in the delay domain.
结合第一方面,在第一方面的某些实现方式中,所述SRS资源的配置信息还包括区间间隔,所述区间间隔表示所述第一取值范围内相邻两个子区间包含的值的最小值的差值的绝对值,In combination with the first aspect, in some implementations of the first aspect, the configuration information of the SRS resource further includes an interval interval, where the interval interval represents an absolute value of a difference between the minimum values of the values contained in two adjacent sub-intervals within the first value range,
所述第一端口对应的循环移位值偏置是根据第一数值、所述子区间长度和所述区间间隔确定的,所述第一数值是根据所述SRS的发送时刻和/或所述第一端口的梳齿偏置值确定的。The cyclic shift value offset corresponding to the first port is determined according to a first value, the sub-interval length and the interval interval, and the first value is determined according to the transmission time of the SRS and/or the comb tooth offset value of the first port.
结合第一方面,在第一方面的某些实现方式中,所述第一端口对应的循环移位值偏置满足下述关系: In combination with the first aspect, in some implementations of the first aspect, the cyclic shift value offset corresponding to the first port satisfies the following relationship:
或者,
or,
其中,所述为所述第一端口对应的循环移位值偏置,所述δ为第一数值,所述第一数值是根据所述SRS的发送时刻以及伪随机序列确定的,所述L为所述子区间长度,所述Δ为所述区间间隔,其中所述L的取值范围为 为最大循环移位值。Among them, the is the cyclic shift value offset corresponding to the first port, the δ is a first value, the first value is determined according to the transmission time of the SRS and the pseudo-random sequence, the L is the sub-interval length, the Δ is the interval, and the value range of L is is the maximum cyclic shift value.
结合第一方面,在第一方面的某些实现方式中,所述第一端口对应的初始循环移位值满足下述关系:In combination with the first aspect, in some implementations of the first aspect, the initial cyclic shift value corresponding to the first port satisfies the following relationship:
或者, or,
或者, or,
或者,
or,
其中,所述为所述第一端口对应的初始循环移位值,所述为最大循环移位值,所述为所述第一端口对应的循环移位参考索引,所述为N的取值,所述pi为所述第一端口的索引,所述为所述第一端口对应的循环移位值偏置,其中函数g(x,y)=xmody或者 Among them, the is the initial cyclic shift value corresponding to the first port, is the maximum cyclic shift value, is the cyclic shift reference index corresponding to the first port, is the value of N, the pi is the index of the first port, the is the cyclic shift value offset corresponding to the first port, where the function g(x,y)=xmody or
结合第一方面,在第一方面的某些实现方式中,所述第一端口对应的初始循环移位值满足的关系是根据预设条件确定的,所述预设条件与SRS资源中的端口数以及所述关联。In combination with the first aspect, in some implementations of the first aspect, the relationship satisfied by the initial cyclic shift value corresponding to the first port is determined according to a preset condition, and the preset condition is related to the number of ports in the SRS resource and the association.
结合第一方面,在第一方面的某些实现方式中,所述预设条件为 In combination with the first aspect, in some implementations of the first aspect, the preset condition is
结合第一方面,在第一方面的某些实现方式中,所述第一端口对应的循环移位满足下述关系:In combination with the first aspect, in some implementations of the first aspect, the cyclic shift corresponding to the first port satisfies the following relationship:
或者, or,
或者, or,
或者,
or,
其中,所述αi为所述第一端口对应的循环移位,所述为所述第一端口对应的初始循环移位值,所述为最大循环移位值,所述为所述第一端口对应的循环移位值偏置。其中函数g(x,y)=xmody或者 Wherein, the α i is the cyclic shift corresponding to the first port, is the initial cyclic shift value corresponding to the first port, is the maximum cyclic shift value, is the cyclic shift value offset corresponding to the first port. Wherein the function g(x,y)=xmody or
结合第一方面,在第一方面的某些实现方式中,所述第一端口对应的循环移位满足下述关系:
In combination with the first aspect, in some implementations of the first aspect, the cyclic shift corresponding to the first port satisfies the following relationship:
其中函数g(x,y)=xmody或者或者,
The function g(x,y) = xmody or or,
其中函数g(x,y)=xmody或者或者,
The function g(x,y) = xmody or or,
其中函数g(x,y)=xmody或者或者,
The function g(x,y) = xmody or or,
其中函数g(x,y)=xmody或者或者,The function g(x,y) = xmody or or,
其中,所述αi为所述第一端口对应的循环移位,所述为所述第一端口对应的初始循环移位值,所述为最大循环移位值,所述为所述第一端口对应的循环移位参考索引,所述为N的取值,所述pi为所述第一端口的索引,所述为所述第一端口对应的循环移位值偏置,所述预设条件为 Wherein, the α i is the cyclic shift corresponding to the first port, is the initial cyclic shift value corresponding to the first port, is the maximum cyclic shift value, is the cyclic shift reference index corresponding to the first port, is the value of N, the pi is the index of the first port, the is the cyclic shift value offset corresponding to the first port, and the preset condition is
结合第一方面,在第一方面的某些实现方式中,所述SRS资源的配置信息指示第一方向,所述第一方向用于确定所述第一端口对应的循环移位值偏置的正负。In combination with the first aspect, in certain implementations of the first aspect, the configuration information of the SRS resource indicates a first direction, and the first direction is used to determine the positive or negative of a cyclic shift value bias corresponding to the first port.
应理解,第一方向可以是预定义的,或者预配置的,或者配置的,也就是说。第一方向不一定在SRS资源的配置信息中。It should be understood that the first direction may be predefined, or preconfigured, or configured, that is, the first direction is not necessarily in the configuration information of the SRS resource.
该方式中,网络设备向终端设备配置循环移位偏置的方向,即SRS序列在码域上的移动方向,避免终端设备循环移位采用错误的偏置方向,进一步降低了不同SRS之间干扰的可能。In this method, the network device configures the direction of the cyclic shift bias to the terminal device, that is, the direction of movement of the SRS sequence in the code domain, to avoid the terminal device using the wrong bias direction for cyclic shift, further reducing the possibility of interference between different SRSs.
结合第一方面,在第一方面的某些实现方式中,所述第一端口对应的循环移位值偏置满足下述关系:
In combination with the first aspect, in some implementations of the first aspect, the cyclic shift value offset corresponding to the first port satisfies the following relationship:
其中,所述为所述第一端口对应的循环移位值偏置,所述δ为第一数值,所述第一数值是根据所述SRS的发送时刻以及伪随机序列确定的,所述L为所述第一区间长度,所述b的取值表示所述第一方向。Among them, the is the cyclic shift value offset corresponding to the first port, the δ is a first value, the first value is determined according to the sending time of the SRS and a pseudo-random sequence, the L is the first interval length, and the value of b represents the first direction.
可选的,L的取值范围为 Optional, the value range of L is
结合第一方面,在第一方面的某些实现方式中,所述SRS资源的配置信息包括第一区间长度,所述第一区间长度为所述第一取值范围包括的子区间的长度,所述第一方向用于确定所述第一端口对应的循环移位值偏置的正负,所述第一端口对应的循环移位值偏置是根据第一数值和所述第一区间长度确定的,所述第一数值是根据所述SRS的发送时刻和/或所述第一端口的梳齿偏置值确定的所述SRS资源的配置信息还指示第二区间长度,所述第一取值范围的子区间长度为所述第一区间长度和第二区间长度之和。In combination with the first aspect, in certain implementations of the first aspect, the configuration information of the SRS resource includes a first interval length, the first interval length is the length of a sub-interval included in the first value range, the first direction is used to determine the positive or negative of the cyclic shift value offset corresponding to the first port, the cyclic shift value offset corresponding to the first port is determined based on a first numerical value and the first interval length, the first numerical value is determined based on the sending time of the SRS and/or the comb tooth offset value of the first port, the configuration information of the SRS resource also indicates a second interval length, and the sub-interval length of the first value range is the sum of the first interval length and the second interval length.
也就是说,第一取值范围的子区间长度通过两个长度参数确定。That is to say, the length of the subinterval of the first value range is determined by two length parameters.
结合第一方面,在第一方面的某些实现方式中,所述第一端口对应的循环移位值偏置满足下述关系:
In combination with the first aspect, in some implementations of the first aspect, the cyclic shift value offset corresponding to the first port satisfies the following relationship:
其中,所述为所述第一端口对应的循环移位值偏置,所述δ为第一数值,所述第一数值是根据所述SRS的发送时刻以及伪随机序列确定的,所述γ为第二数值,所述第二数值是根据所述SRS的发送时刻以及伪随机序列确定的,所述L1为所述第一区间长度,所述L2为所述第二区间长度。Among them, the is the cyclic shift value offset corresponding to the first port, the δ is a first value, the first value is determined according to the sending time of the SRS and the pseudo-random sequence, the γ is a second value, the second value is determined according to the sending time of the SRS and the pseudo-random sequence, the L1 is the first interval length, and the L2 is the second interval length.
可选的,L1的取值范围为 Optional, L1 value range is
可选的,L2的取值范围为 Optional, L2 value range is
结合第一方面,在第一方面的某些实现方式中,所述第一取值范围包括两个或两个以上所述子区间,任意两个所述子区间在时延域上不重叠。In combination with the first aspect, in some implementations of the first aspect, the first value range includes two or more sub-intervals, and any two of the sub-intervals do not overlap in the delay domain.
应理解,本申请中的时延域可以是码域。 It should be understood that the delay domain in the present application may be a code domain.
任意两个子区间在时延域上不重叠,包括两种情况,任意两个子区间在时延域上无交集,任意两个子区间在时延域上有交集。Any two sub-intervals do not overlap in the delay domain, including two cases: any two sub-intervals have no intersection in the delay domain, and any two sub-intervals have an intersection in the delay domain.
结合第一方面,在第一方面的某些实现方式中,所述SRS资源的配置信息指示第一子区间的长度和区间间隔,所述区间间隔表示所述第一取值范围内相邻两个子区间包含的值的最小值的差值的绝对值,所述第一子区间为所述两个或两个以上所述子区间中的一个。In combination with the first aspect, in certain implementations of the first aspect, the configuration information of the SRS resource indicates the length and interval interval of the first sub-interval, the interval interval represents the absolute value of the difference between the minimum values of the values contained in two adjacent sub-intervals within the first value range, and the first sub-interval is one of the two or more sub-intervals.
该方式中,扩大了端口循环移位随机化的范围,使SRS信号各端口对应的循环移位随时间在一个离散集合范围内进行变换,能够使得端口在不同时间面临不同的干扰,进一步提升了干扰随机化性能。In this method, the range of port cyclic shift randomization is expanded, so that the cyclic shift corresponding to each port of the SRS signal changes within a discrete set range over time, which can make the port face different interference at different times, further improving the interference randomization performance.
结合第一方面,在第一方面的某些实现方式中,所述第一端口对应的循环移位值偏置满足下述关系:In combination with the first aspect, in some implementations of the first aspect, the cyclic shift value offset corresponding to the first port satisfies the following relationship:
或者,
or,
其中,所述为所述第一端口对应的循环移位值偏置,所述δ为第一数值,所述第一数值是根据所述SRS的发送时刻以及伪随机序列确定的,所述L3为所述第一子区间的长度,所述Δ为所述区间间隔。Among them, the is the cyclic shift value offset corresponding to the first port, the δ is a first value, the first value is determined according to the sending time of the SRS and a pseudo-random sequence, the L3 is the length of the first sub-interval, and the Δ is the interval.
可选的,L3的取值范围为 Optional, the value range of L3 is
应理解,区间间隔可以是预定义的,或者预配置的,或者配置的,也就是说。区间间隔不一定在SRS资源的配置信息中。It should be understood that the interval interval may be predefined, or preconfigured, or configured, that is, the interval interval is not necessarily in the configuration information of the SRS resource.
结合第一方面,在第一方面的某些实现方式中,所述第一端口对应的循环移位值偏置满足下述关系:
In combination with the first aspect, in some implementations of the first aspect, the cyclic shift value offset corresponding to the first port satisfies the following relationship:
其中,所述为所述第一端口对应的循环移位值偏置,所述δ为第一数值,所述第一数值是根据所述SRS的发送时刻以及伪随机序列确定的,所述b的取值表示所述第一方向,所述L3为所述第一子区间的长度,所述Δ为所述区间间隔。Among them, the is the cyclic shift value offset corresponding to the first port, the δ is a first numerical value, the first numerical value is determined according to the sending time of the SRS and the pseudo-random sequence, the value of b represents the first direction, the L3 is the length of the first sub-interval, and the Δ is the interval.
可选的,L3的取值范围为 Optional, the value range of L3 is
结合第一方面,在第一方面的某些实现方式中,所述SRS资源的配置信息还指示所述第一端口对应的循环移位偏置取值粒度。In combination with the first aspect, in certain implementations of the first aspect, the configuration information of the SRS resource further indicates a granularity of a cyclic shift bias value corresponding to the first port.
结合第一方面,在第一方面的某些实现方式中,所述第一端口对应的循环移位满足下述关系:
In combination with the first aspect, in some implementations of the first aspect, the cyclic shift corresponding to the first port satisfies the following relationship:
或者,
或者,
or,
or,
或者,
or,
或者,
or,
或者,
or,
或者,
or,
或者,
or,
或者,
or,
或者,
or,
或者,
or,
其中,αi为所述第一端口对应的循环移位,所述为所述第一端口对应的初始循环移位值,所述 为最大循环移位值,所述为所述第一端口对应的循环移位参考索引,所述为N的取值,所述pi为所述第一端口的索引,所述为所述第一端口对应的循环移位值偏置,所述K为所述第一端口对应的循环移位偏置取值粒度。Wherein, α i is the cyclic shift corresponding to the first port, is the initial cyclic shift value corresponding to the first port, is the maximum cyclic shift value, is the cyclic shift reference index corresponding to the first port, is the value of N, the pi is the index of the first port, the is the cyclic shift value offset corresponding to the first port, and K is the granularity of the cyclic shift offset value corresponding to the first port.
该方式中,通过循环移位偏置取值粒度进一步将循环移位偏置精细化,使得循环移位偏置有更多的选择,提升了循环移位的灵活性。In this method, the cyclic shift offset is further refined through the granularity of the cyclic shift offset value, so that the cyclic shift offset has more options and the flexibility of the cyclic shift is improved.
可选的,K的取值范围为{0,1,2}。Optionally, the value range of K is {0,1,2}.
结合第一方面,在第一方面的某些实现方式中,所述第一取值范围包括的子区间数量为1。In combination with the first aspect, in some implementations of the first aspect, the number of sub-intervals included in the first value range is 1.
结合第一方面,在第一方面的某些实现方式中,所述第一端口的循环移位值偏置为整数。In combination with the first aspect, in some implementations of the first aspect, the cyclic shift value bias of the first port is an integer.
结合第一方面,在第一方面的某些实现方式中,所述SRS资源的配置信息指示第一区间长度,所述第一区间长度为所述第一取值范围包括的子区间的长度。In combination with the first aspect, in some implementations of the first aspect, the configuration information of the SRS resource indicates a first interval length, and the first interval length is the length of a sub-interval included in the first value range.
结合第一方面,在第一方面的某些实现方式中,所述第一端口对应的循环移位值偏置满足下述关系:In combination with the first aspect, in some implementations of the first aspect, the cyclic shift value offset corresponding to the first port satisfies the following relationship:
或者, or,
或者, or,
或者,
or,
其中,所述为所述第一端口对应的循环移位值偏置,所述δ为第一数值,所述第一数值是根据所述SRS的发送时刻以及伪随机序列确定的,所述L为所述第一区间长度,所述K为所述第一端口对应的循环移位偏置取值粒度。Among them, the is the cyclic shift value offset corresponding to the first port, the δ is a first value, the first value is determined according to the sending time of the SRS and the pseudo-random sequence, the L is the first interval length, and the K is the granularity of the cyclic shift offset value corresponding to the first port.
可选的,L的取值范围为 Optional, the value range of L is
结合第一方面,在第一方面的某些实现方式中,所述第一端口对应的循环移位值偏置满足下述关系:In combination with the first aspect, in some implementations of the first aspect, the cyclic shift value offset corresponding to the first port satisfies the following relationship:
或者, or,
或者, or,
或者,
or,
可选的,L的取值范围为 Optional, the value range of L is
或者, or,
或者, or,
或者, or,
或者, or,
可选的,L的取值范围为 Optional, the value range of L is
各参数的含义可以参考上述实现方式,不赘述。The meaning of each parameter can be referred to the above implementation method and will not be repeated here.
结合第一方面,在第一方面的某些实现方式中,所述SRS资源的配置信息指示第一方向,所述第一方向用于确定所述第一端口对应的循环移位值偏置的正负。In combination with the first aspect, in certain implementations of the first aspect, the configuration information of the SRS resource indicates a first direction, and the first direction is used to determine the positive or negative of a cyclic shift value bias corresponding to the first port.
该方式中,网络设备向终端设备配置循环移位偏置的方向,即SRS序列在码域上的移动方向,避免终端设备循环移位采用错误的偏置方向,进一步降低了不同SRS之间干扰的可能。In this method, the network device configures the direction of the cyclic shift bias to the terminal device, that is, the direction of movement of the SRS sequence in the code domain, to avoid the terminal device using the wrong bias direction for cyclic shift, further reducing the possibility of interference between different SRSs.
结合第一方面,在第一方面的某些实现方式中,所述第一端口对应的循环移位值偏置满足下述关系:In combination with the first aspect, in some implementations of the first aspect, the cyclic shift value offset corresponding to the first port satisfies the following relationship:
或者,
or,
其中,所述为所述第一端口对应的循环移位值偏置,所述δ为第一数值,所述第一数值是根据所述SRS的发送时刻以及伪随机序列确定的,所述L为所述第一区间长度,所述b的取值表示所述第一方向,所述K为所述第一端口对应的循环移位偏置取值粒度。Among them, the is the cyclic shift value offset corresponding to the first port, the δ is a first numerical value, the first numerical value is determined according to the sending time of the SRS and the pseudo-random sequence, the L is the length of the first interval, the value of b represents the first direction, and the K is the granularity of the cyclic shift offset value corresponding to the first port.
可选的,L的取值范围为 Optional, the value range of L is
结合第一方面,在第一方面的某些实现方式中,所述第一端口对应的循环移位值偏置满足下述关系:In combination with the first aspect, in some implementations of the first aspect, the cyclic shift value offset corresponding to the first port satisfies the following relationship:
或者,
or,
可选的,L的取值范围为 Optional, the value range of L is
各参数的含义可以参考上述实现方式,不赘述。The meaning of each parameter can be referred to the above implementation method and will not be repeated here.
结合第一方面,在第一方面的某些实现方式中,所述SRS资源的配置信息还指示第二区间长度,所述第一取值范围的子区间长度为所述第一区间长度和第二区间长度之和。In combination with the first aspect, in some implementations of the first aspect, the configuration information of the SRS resource further indicates a second interval length, and the sub-interval length of the first value range is the sum of the first interval length and the second interval length.
也就是说,第一取值范围的子区间长度通过两个长度参数确定。That is to say, the length of the subinterval of the first value range is determined by two length parameters.
结合第一方面,在第一方面的某些实现方式中,所述第一端口对应的循环移位值偏置满足下述关系:In combination with the first aspect, in some implementations of the first aspect, the cyclic shift value offset corresponding to the first port satisfies the following relationship:
或者,
or,
其中,所述为所述第一端口对应的循环移位值偏置,所述δ为第一数值,所述第一数值是根据所述SRS的发送时刻以及伪随机序列确定的,所述γ为第二数值,所述第二数值是根据所述SRS的发送时刻以及伪随机序列确定的,所述L1为所述第一区间长度,所述L2为所述第二区间长度,所述K为所述第一端口对应的循环移位偏置取值粒度。Among them, the is the cyclic shift value offset corresponding to the first port, the δ is a first value, the first value is determined according to the sending time of the SRS and the pseudo-random sequence, the γ is a second value, the second value is determined according to the sending time of the SRS and the pseudo-random sequence, the L1 is the first interval length, the L2 is the second interval length, and the K is the granularity of the cyclic shift offset value corresponding to the first port.
可选的,L1的取值范围为 Optional, L1 value range is
可选的,L2的取值范围为 Optional, L2 value range is
结合第一方面,在第一方面的某些实现方式中,所述第一端口对应的循环移位值偏置满足下述关系:In combination with the first aspect, in some implementations of the first aspect, the cyclic shift value offset corresponding to the first port satisfies the following relationship:
或者,
or,
可选的,L1的取值范围为 Optional, L1 value range is
可选的,L2的取值范围为 Optional, L2 value range is
各参数的含义可以参考上述实现方式,不赘述。The meaning of each parameter can be referred to the above implementation method and will not be repeated here.
结合第一方面,在第一方面的某些实现方式中,所述第一取值范围包括两个或两个以上所述子区间,任意两个所述子区间在时延域上不重叠。In combination with the first aspect, in some implementations of the first aspect, the first value range includes two or more sub-intervals, and any two of the sub-intervals do not overlap in the delay domain.
应理解,本申请中的时延域可以是码域。It should be understood that the delay domain in the present application may be a code domain.
任意两个子区间在时延域上不重叠,包括两种情况,任意两个子区间在时延域上无交集,任意两个子区间在时延域上有交集。Any two sub-intervals do not overlap in the delay domain, including two cases: any two sub-intervals have no intersection in the delay domain, and any two sub-intervals have an intersection in the delay domain.
结合第一方面,在第一方面的某些实现方式中,所述SRS资源的配置信息指示第一子区间的长度和区间间隔,所述区间间隔表示所述第一取值范围内相邻两个子区间包含的值的最小值的差值的绝对值,所述第一子区间为所述两个或两个以上所述子区间中的一个。In combination with the first aspect, in certain implementations of the first aspect, the configuration information of the SRS resource indicates the length and interval interval of the first sub-interval, the interval interval represents the absolute value of the difference between the minimum values of the values contained in two adjacent sub-intervals within the first value range, and the first sub-interval is one of the two or more sub-intervals.
该方式中,扩大了端口循环移位随机化的范围,使SRS信号各端口对应的循环移位随时间在一个离散集合范围内进行变换,能够使得端口在不同时间面临不同的干扰,进一步提升了干扰随机化性能。In this method, the range of port cyclic shift randomization is expanded, so that the cyclic shift corresponding to each port of the SRS signal changes within a discrete set range over time, which can make the port face different interference at different times, further improving the interference randomization performance.
结合第一方面,在第一方面的某些实现方式中,所述第一端口对应的循环移位值偏置满足下述关系:In combination with the first aspect, in some implementations of the first aspect, the cyclic shift value offset corresponding to the first port satisfies the following relationship:
或者,
or,
其中,所述为所述第一端口对应的循环移位值偏置,所述δ为第一数值,所述第一数值是根据所述SRS的发送时刻以及伪随机序列确定的,所述L3为所述第一子区间的长度,所述Δ为所述区间间隔,所述K为所述第一端口对应的循环移位偏置取值粒度。Among them, the is the cyclic shift value offset corresponding to the first port, the δ is a first numerical value, the first numerical value is determined according to the sending time of the SRS and the pseudo-random sequence, the L3 is the length of the first sub-interval, the Δ is the interval, and the K is the granularity of the cyclic shift offset value corresponding to the first port.
可选的,L3的取值范围为 Optional, the value range of L3 is
结合第一方面,在第一方面的某些实现方式中,所述第一端口对应的循环移位值偏置满足下述关系:In combination with the first aspect, in some implementations of the first aspect, the cyclic shift value offset corresponding to the first port satisfies the following relationship:
或者, or,
或者, or,
或者, or,
或者, or,
或者,
or,
可选的,L3的取值范围为 Optional, the value range of L3 is
各参数的含义可以参考上述实现方式,不赘述。The meaning of each parameter can be referred to the above implementation method and will not be repeated here.
结合第一方面,在第一方面的某些实现方式中,所述第一端口对应的循环移位值偏置满足下述关系:In combination with the first aspect, in some implementations of the first aspect, the cyclic shift value offset corresponding to the first port satisfies the following relationship:
或者,
or,
其中,所述为所述第一端口对应的循环移位值偏置,所述δ为第一数值,所述第一数值是根据所述SRS的发送时刻以及伪随机序列确定的,所述b的取值表示所述第一方向,所述L3为所述第一子区间的长度,所述Δ为所述区间间隔,所述K为所述第一端口对应的循环移位偏置取值粒度。Among them, the is the cyclic shift value offset corresponding to the first port, the δ is a first numerical value, the first numerical value is determined according to the sending time of the SRS and the pseudo-random sequence, the value of b represents the first direction, the L3 is the length of the first sub-interval, the Δ is the interval, and the K is the granularity of the cyclic shift offset value corresponding to the first port.
可选的,L3的取值范围为 Optional, the value range of L3 is
结合第一方面,在第一方面的某些实现方式中,所述第一端口对应的循环移位值偏置满足下述关系:In combination with the first aspect, in some implementations of the first aspect, the cyclic shift value offset corresponding to the first port satisfies the following relationship:
或者,
or,
可选的,L3的取值范围为 Optional, the value range of L3 is
各参数的含义可以参考上述实现方式,不赘述。The meaning of each parameter can be referred to the above implementation method and will not be repeated here.
结合第一方面,在第一方面的某些实现方式中,所述SRS资源的配置信息为占用不同梳齿的端口指示不同的第一子区间的长度、区间间隔、第一方向和循环移位偏置取值粒度中的一个或多个。In combination with the first aspect, in certain implementations of the first aspect, the configuration information of the SRS resource indicates one or more of different first sub-interval lengths, interval intervals, first directions, and cyclic shift bias value granularities for ports occupying different comb teeth.
在该方式中,占用不同梳齿的SRS端口对应的循环移位值偏置及其取值范围可能不同。In this manner, the cyclic shift value offsets and value ranges corresponding to SRS ports occupying different comb teeth may be different.
举例来说,所述SRS资源的配置信息为占用梳齿0的SRS端口配置了第一套参数,第一套参数包括第一子区间的长度、区间间隔、第一方向和循环移位偏置取值粒度中的一个或多个,同时为占用梳齿1的SRS配置了第二套参数,第二套参数包括第一子区间的长度、区间间隔、第一方向和循环移位偏置取值粒度中的一个或多个,而第一套参数和第二套参数不相同。For example, the configuration information of the SRS resource configures a first set of parameters for the SRS port occupying comb tooth 0, and the first set of parameters includes one or more of the length of the first sub-interval, the interval interval, the first direction, and the granularity of the cyclic shift bias value. At the same time, a second set of parameters is configured for the SRS occupying comb tooth 1, and the second set of parameters includes one or more of the length of the first sub-interval, the interval interval, the first direction, and the granularity of the cyclic shift bias value, and the first set of parameters and the second set of parameters are different.
第二方面,本申请实施例提供一种通信方法,该方法可以由网络设备执行,或者,也可以由用于网络设备的芯片或电路执行,本申请对此不作限定。为了便于描述,下面以由网络设备执行为例进行说明。In a second aspect, the embodiment of the present application provides a communication method, which can be executed by a network device, or can also be executed by a chip or circuit used for a network device, and the present application does not limit this. For ease of description, the following is an example of execution by a network device.
该方法包括:确定SRS资源;发送探测参考信号SRS资源的配置信息,所述SRS资源包括N个端口, 所述SRS资源的配置信息中包括循环移位参考索引、梳齿偏置值和子区间长度L;The method comprises: determining an SRS resource; sending configuration information of a sounding reference signal SRS resource, wherein the SRS resource comprises N ports, The configuration information of the SRS resource includes a cyclic shift reference index, a comb tooth offset value and a sub-interval length L;
所述循环移位参考索引、所述第一端口的索引和所述第一端口对应的循环移位值偏置用于确定第一端口对应的循环移位,所述第一端口为所述N个端口中的一个;其中,所述第一端口对应的循环移位值偏置是根据所述SRS的发送时刻和/或所述第一端口的梳齿偏置值,和所述子区间长度确定的。The cyclic shift reference index, the index of the first port and the cyclic shift value offset corresponding to the first port are used to determine the cyclic shift corresponding to the first port, and the first port is one of the N ports; wherein the cyclic shift value offset corresponding to the first port is determined according to the sending time of the SRS and/or the comb tooth offset value of the first port, and the sub-interval length.
所述子区间的长度为子区间中所包含的数值的个数,所述数值为整数。The length of the sub-interval is the number of values contained in the sub-interval, and the value is an integer.
结合第二方面,在第二方面的某些实现方式中,所述第一端口对应的循环移位值偏置属于第一取值范围,所述第一取值范围为一个子区间,或所述第一取值范围为多个长度为L的子区间。In combination with the second aspect, in certain implementations of the second aspect, the cyclic shift value offset corresponding to the first port belongs to a first value range, the first value range is a sub-interval, or the first value range is multiple sub-intervals of length L.
结合第二方面,在第二方面的某些实现方式中,所述N个端口中的每个端口分别对应的循环移位值偏置相同。In combination with the second aspect, in certain implementations of the second aspect, the cyclic shift value offset corresponding to each port of the N ports is the same.
结合第二方面,在第二方面的某些实现方式中,所述第一端口对应的循环移位满足下述关系:
In conjunction with the second aspect, in some implementations of the second aspect, the cyclic shift corresponding to the first port satisfies the following relationship:
或者,
or,
或者,
or,
其中,αi为所述第一端口对应的循环移位,所述为所述第一端口对应的初始循环移位值,所述为最大循环移位值,所述为所述第一端口对应的循环移位参考索引,所述为N的取值,所述pi为所述第一端口的索引,所述为所述第一端口对应的循环移位值偏置。Wherein, α i is the cyclic shift corresponding to the first port, is the initial cyclic shift value corresponding to the first port, is the maximum cyclic shift value, is the cyclic shift reference index corresponding to the first port, is the value of N, the pi is the index of the first port, the A cyclic shift value offset corresponding to the first port.
结合第二方面,在第二方面的某些实现方式中,所述第一取值范围包括的子区间数量为1。In combination with the second aspect, in some implementations of the second aspect, the number of sub-intervals included in the first value range is 1.
结合第二方面,在第二方面的某些实现方式中,所述第一端口的循环移位值偏置为整数。In combination with the second aspect, in certain implementations of the second aspect, the cyclic shift value bias of the first port is an integer.
结合第二方面,在第二方面的某些实现方式中,所述SRS资源的配置信息指示第一区间长度,所述第一区间长度为所述第一取值范围包括的子区间的长度。In combination with the second aspect, in some implementations of the second aspect, the configuration information of the SRS resource indicates a first interval length, and the first interval length is the length of a sub-interval included in the first value range.
结合第二方面,在第二方面的某些实现方式中,所述第一端口对应的循环移位值偏置是根据第一数值和子区间长度确定的,所述第一数值是根据所述SRS的发送时刻和/或所述第一端口的梳齿偏置值确定的。In combination with the second aspect, in certain implementations of the second aspect, the cyclic shift value offset corresponding to the first port is determined based on a first numerical value and a sub-interval length, and the first numerical value is determined based on the sending time of the SRS and/or the comb tooth offset value of the first port.
结合第二方面,在第二方面的某些实现方式中,所述第一端口对应的循环移位值偏置满足下述关系:In conjunction with the second aspect, in some implementations of the second aspect, the cyclic shift value offset corresponding to the first port satisfies the following relationship:
或者,
or,
其中,所述为所述第一端口对应的循环移位值偏置,所述δ为第一数值,所述第一数值是根据所述SRS的发送时刻以及伪随机序列确定的,所述L为所述第一区间长度。Among them, the is the cyclic shift value offset corresponding to the first port, the δ is a first value, the first value is determined according to the sending time of the SRS and a pseudo-random sequence, and the L is the length of the first interval.
可选的,L的取值范围为 为最大循环移位值。Optional, the value range of L is is the maximum cyclic shift value.
结合第二方面,在第二方面的某些实现方式中,所述第一取值范围包括两个或两个以上所述子区间,任意两个所述子区间在时延域上不重叠。 In combination with the second aspect, in certain implementations of the second aspect, the first value range includes two or more sub-intervals, and any two of the sub-intervals do not overlap in the delay domain.
结合第二方面,在第二方面的某些实现方式中,所述SRS资源的配置信息还包括区间间隔,所述区间间隔表示所述第一取值范围内相邻两个子区间包含的值的最小值的差值的绝对值,In combination with the second aspect, in some implementations of the second aspect, the configuration information of the SRS resource further includes an interval interval, where the interval interval represents an absolute value of a difference between the minimum values of the values contained in two adjacent sub-intervals within the first value range,
所述第一端口对应的循环移位值偏置是根据第一数值、所述子区间长度和所述区间间隔确定的,所述第一数值是根据所述SRS的发送时刻和/或所述第一端口的梳齿偏置值确定的。The cyclic shift value offset corresponding to the first port is determined according to a first value, the sub-interval length and the interval interval, and the first value is determined according to the transmission time of the SRS and/or the comb tooth offset value of the first port.
结合第二方面,在第二方面的某些实现方式中,所述第一端口对应的循环移位值偏置满足下述关系:In conjunction with the second aspect, in some implementations of the second aspect, the cyclic shift value offset corresponding to the first port satisfies the following relationship:
或者,
or,
其中,所述为所述第一端口对应的循环移位值偏置,所述δ为第一数值,所述第一数值是根据所述SRS的发送时刻以及伪随机序列确定的,所述L为所述子区间长度,所述Δ为所述区间间隔,其中所述L的取值范围为 为最大循环移位值。Among them, the is the cyclic shift value offset corresponding to the first port, the δ is a first value, the first value is determined according to the transmission time of the SRS and the pseudo-random sequence, the L is the sub-interval length, the Δ is the interval, and the value range of L is is the maximum cyclic shift value.
结合第二方面,在第二方面的某些实现方式中,所述第一端口对应的初始循环移位值满足下述关系:In conjunction with the second aspect, in some implementations of the second aspect, the initial cyclic shift value corresponding to the first port satisfies the following relationship:
或者, or,
或者, or,
或者,
or,
其中,所述为所述第一端口对应的初始循环移位值,所述为最大循环移位值,所述为所述第一端口对应的循环移位参考索引,所述为N的取值,所述pi为所述第一端口的索引,所述为所述第一端口对应的循环移位值偏置,其中函数g(x,y)=xmody或者 Among them, the is the initial cyclic shift value corresponding to the first port, is the maximum cyclic shift value, is the cyclic shift reference index corresponding to the first port, is the value of N, the pi is the index of the first port, the is the cyclic shift value offset corresponding to the first port, where the function g(x,y)=xmody or
结合第二方面,在第二方面的某些实现方式中,所述第一端口对应的初始循环移位值满足的关系是根据预设条件确定的,所述预设条件与SRS资源中的端口数以及所述关联。In conjunction with the second aspect, in some implementations of the second aspect, the relationship satisfied by the initial cyclic shift value corresponding to the first port is determined according to a preset condition, and the preset condition is related to the number of ports in the SRS resource and the association.
结合第二方面,在第二方面的某些实现方式中,所述预设条件为 In conjunction with the second aspect, in some implementations of the second aspect, the preset condition is
结合第二方面,在第二方面的某些实现方式中,所述第一端口对应的循环移位满足下述关系:In conjunction with the second aspect, in some implementations of the second aspect, the cyclic shift corresponding to the first port satisfies the following relationship:
或者, or,
或者, or,
或者,
or,
其中,所述αi为所述第一端口对应的循环移位,所述为所述第一端口对应的初始循环移位值,所述为最大循环移位值,所述为所述第一端口对应的循环移位值偏置。其中函数g(x,y)=xmody或者 Wherein, the α i is the cyclic shift corresponding to the first port, is the initial cyclic shift value corresponding to the first port, is the maximum cyclic shift value, is the cyclic shift value offset corresponding to the first port. Wherein the function g(x,y)=xmody or
结合第二方面,在第二方面的某些实现方式中,所述第一端口对应的循环移位满足下述关系:
In conjunction with the second aspect, in some implementations of the second aspect, the cyclic shift corresponding to the first port satisfies the following relationship:
其中函数g(x,y)=xmody或者或者,
The function g(x,y) = xmody or or,
其中函数g(x,y)=xmody或者或者,
The function g(x,y) = xmody or or,
其中函数g(x,y)=xmody或者或者,
The function g(x,y) = xmody or or,
其中函数g(x,y)=xmody或者或者,The function g(x,y) = xmody or or,
其中,所述αi为所述第一端口对应的循环移位,所述为所述第一端口对应的初始循环移位值,所述为最大循环移位值,所述为所述第一端口对应的循环移位参考索引,所述为N的取值,所述pi为所述第一端口的索引,所述为所述第一端口对应的循环移位值偏置,所述预设条件为 Wherein, the α i is the cyclic shift corresponding to the first port, is the initial cyclic shift value corresponding to the first port, is the maximum cyclic shift value, is the cyclic shift reference index corresponding to the first port, is the value of N, the pi is the index of the first port, the is the cyclic shift value offset corresponding to the first port, and the preset condition is
结合第二方面,在第二方面的某些实现方式中,所述SRS资源的配置信息指示第一方向,所述第一方向用于确定所述第一端口对应的循环移位值偏置的正负。In combination with the second aspect, in certain implementations of the second aspect, the configuration information of the SRS resource indicates a first direction, and the first direction is used to determine the positive or negative of a cyclic shift value bias corresponding to the first port.
该方式中,网络设备向终端设备配置循环移位偏置的方向,即SRS序列在码域上的移动方向,避免终端设备循环移位采用错误的偏置方向,进一步降低了不同SRS之间干扰的可能。In this method, the network device configures the direction of the cyclic shift bias to the terminal device, that is, the direction of movement of the SRS sequence in the code domain, to avoid the terminal device using the wrong bias direction for cyclic shift, further reducing the possibility of interference between different SRSs.
结合第二方面,在第二方面的某些实现方式中,所述第一端口对应的循环移位值偏置满足下述关系:
In conjunction with the second aspect, in some implementations of the second aspect, the cyclic shift value offset corresponding to the first port satisfies the following relationship:
其中,所述为所述第一端口对应的循环移位值偏置,所述δ为第一数值,所述第一数值是根据所述SRS的发送时刻以及伪随机序列确定的,所述L为所述第一区间长度,所述b的取值表示所述第一方向。Among them, the is the cyclic shift value offset corresponding to the first port, the δ is a first value, the first value is determined according to the sending time of the SRS and a pseudo-random sequence, the L is the first interval length, and the value of b represents the first direction.
可选的,L的取值范围为 Optional, the value range of L is
结合第二方面,在第二方面的某些实现方式中,所述SRS资源的配置信息包括第一区间长度,所述第一区间长度为所述第一取值范围包括的子区间的长度,所述第一方向用于确定所述第一端口对应的循环移位值偏置的正负,所述第一端口对应的循环移位值偏置是根据第一数值和所述第一区间长度确定的,所述第一数值是根据所述SRS的发送时刻和/或所述第一端口的梳齿偏置值确定的所述SRS资源的配置信息还指示第二区间长度,所述第一取值范围的子区间长度为所述第一区间长度和第二区间长度之和。In combination with the second aspect, in certain implementations of the second aspect, the configuration information of the SRS resource includes a first interval length, the first interval length is the length of a sub-interval included in the first value range, the first direction is used to determine the positive or negative of the cyclic shift value bias corresponding to the first port, the cyclic shift value bias corresponding to the first port is determined based on the first numerical value and the first interval length, the first numerical value is determined based on the sending time of the SRS and/or the comb tooth bias value of the first port, the configuration information of the SRS resource also indicates a second interval length, and the sub-interval length of the first value range is the sum of the first interval length and the second interval length.
也就是说,第一取值范围的子区间长度通过两个长度参数确定。That is to say, the length of the subinterval of the first value range is determined by two length parameters.
结合第二方面,在第二方面的某些实现方式中,所述第一端口对应的循环移位值偏置满足下述关系:
In conjunction with the second aspect, in some implementations of the second aspect, the cyclic shift value offset corresponding to the first port satisfies the following relationship:
其中,所述为所述第一端口对应的循环移位值偏置,所述δ为第一数值,所述第一数值是根据所述SRS的发送时刻以及伪随机序列确定的,所述γ为第二数值,所述第二数值是根据所述SRS的发送时刻以及伪随机序列确定的,所述L1为所述第一区间长度,所述L2为所述第二区间长度。Among them, the is the cyclic shift value offset corresponding to the first port, the δ is a first value, the first value is determined according to the sending time of the SRS and the pseudo-random sequence, the γ is a second value, the second value is determined according to the sending time of the SRS and the pseudo-random sequence, the L1 is the first interval length, and the L2 is the second interval length.
可选的,L1的取值范围为 Optional, L1 value range is
可选的,L2的取值范围为 Optional, L2 value range is
结合第二方面,在第二方面的某些实现方式中,所述第一取值范围包括两个或两个以上所述子区间,任意两个所述子区间在时延域上不重叠。In combination with the second aspect, in certain implementations of the second aspect, the first value range includes two or more sub-intervals, and any two of the sub-intervals do not overlap in the delay domain.
应理解,本申请中的时延域可以是码域。It should be understood that the delay domain in the present application may be a code domain.
任意两个子区间在时延域上不重叠,包括两种情况,任意两个子区间在时延域上无交集,任意两个子区间在时延域上有交集。Any two sub-intervals do not overlap in the delay domain, including two cases: any two sub-intervals have no intersection in the delay domain, and any two sub-intervals have an intersection in the delay domain.
结合第二方面,在第二方面的某些实现方式中,所述SRS资源的配置信息指示第一子区间的长度和区间间隔,所述区间间隔表示所述第一取值范围内相邻两个子区间的包含的值的最小值的差值的绝对值,所述第一子区间为所述两个或两个以上所述子区间中的一个。In combination with the second aspect, in certain implementations of the second aspect, the configuration information of the SRS resource indicates the length and interval interval of the first sub-interval, the interval interval represents the absolute value of the difference between the minimum values of the values contained in two adjacent sub-intervals within the first value range, and the first sub-interval is one of the two or more sub-intervals.
该方式中,扩大了端口循环移位随机化的范围,使SRS信号各端口对应的循环移位随时间在一个离散集合范围内进行变换,能够使得端口在不同时间面临不同的干扰,进一步提升了干扰随机化性能。In this method, the range of port cyclic shift randomization is expanded, so that the cyclic shift corresponding to each port of the SRS signal changes within a discrete set range over time, which can make the port face different interference at different times, further improving the interference randomization performance.
结合第二方面,在第二方面的某些实现方式中,所述第一端口对应的循环移位值偏置满足下述关系:In conjunction with the second aspect, in some implementations of the second aspect, the cyclic shift value offset corresponding to the first port satisfies the following relationship:
或者,
or,
其中,所述为所述第一端口对应的循环移位值偏置,所述δ为第一数值,所述第一数值是根据所述SRS的发送时刻以及伪随机序列确定的,所述L3为所述第一子区间的长度,所述Δ为所述区间间隔。Among them, the is the cyclic shift value offset corresponding to the first port, the δ is a first value, the first value is determined according to the sending time of the SRS and a pseudo-random sequence, the L3 is the length of the first sub-interval, and the Δ is the interval.
可选的,L3的取值范围为 Optional, the value range of L3 is
结合第二方面,在第二方面的某些实现方式中,所述第一端口对应的循环移位值偏置满足下述关系:
In conjunction with the second aspect, in some implementations of the second aspect, the cyclic shift value offset corresponding to the first port satisfies the following relationship:
其中,所述为所述第一端口对应的循环移位值偏置,所述δ为第一数值,所述第一数值是根据所述SRS的发送时刻以及伪随机序列确定的,所述b的取值表示所述第一方向,所述L3为所述第一子区间的长度,所述Δ为所述区间间隔。Among them, the is the cyclic shift value offset corresponding to the first port, the δ is a first numerical value, the first numerical value is determined according to the sending time of the SRS and the pseudo-random sequence, the value of b represents the first direction, the L3 is the length of the first sub-interval, and the Δ is the interval.
可选的,L3的取值范围为 Optional, the value range of L3 is
结合第二方面,在第二方面的某些实现方式中,所述SRS资源的配置信息还指示所述第一端口对应的循环移位偏置取值粒度。In combination with the second aspect, in certain implementations of the second aspect, the configuration information of the SRS resource further indicates a granularity of a cyclic shift bias value corresponding to the first port.
结合第二方面,在第二方面的某些实现方式中,所述第一端口对应的循环移位满足下述关系:
In conjunction with the second aspect, in some implementations of the second aspect, the cyclic shift corresponding to the first port satisfies the following relationship:
或者,
or,
或者,
or,
或
者,
or ,
或者,
or,
或者,
or,
或者,
or,
或者,
or,
或者,
or,
或者,
or,
或者,
or,
其中,αi为所述第一端口对应的循环移位,所述为所述第一端口对应的初始循环移位值,所述为最大循环移位值,所述为所述第一端口对应的循环移位参考索引,所述为N的取值,所述pi为所述第一端口的索引,所述为所述第一端口对应的循环移位值偏置,所述K为所述第一端口对应的循环移位偏置取值粒度。Wherein, α i is the cyclic shift corresponding to the first port, is the initial cyclic shift value corresponding to the first port, is the maximum cyclic shift value, is the cyclic shift reference index corresponding to the first port, is the value of N, the pi is the index of the first port, the is the cyclic shift value offset corresponding to the first port, and K is the granularity of the cyclic shift offset value corresponding to the first port.
该方式中,通过循环移位偏置取值粒度进一步将循环移位偏置精细化,使得循环移位偏置有更多的选择,提升了循环移位的灵活性。In this method, the cyclic shift offset is further refined through the granularity of the cyclic shift offset value, so that the cyclic shift offset has more options and the flexibility of the cyclic shift is improved.
结合第二方面,在第二方面的某些实现方式中,所述第一取值范围包括的子区间数量为1。In combination with the second aspect, in some implementations of the second aspect, the number of sub-intervals included in the first value range is 1.
结合第二方面,在第二方面的某些实现方式中,所述第一端口的循环移位值偏置为整数。In combination with the second aspect, in certain implementations of the second aspect, the cyclic shift value bias of the first port is an integer.
结合第二方面,在第二方面的某些实现方式中,所述SRS资源的配置信息指示第一区间长度,所述第一区间长度为所述第一取值范围包括的子区间的长度。In combination with the second aspect, in some implementations of the second aspect, the configuration information of the SRS resource indicates a first interval length, and the first interval length is the length of a sub-interval included in the first value range.
结合第二方面,在第二方面的某些实现方式中,所述第一端口对应的循环移位值偏置满足下述关系:In conjunction with the second aspect, in some implementations of the second aspect, the cyclic shift value offset corresponding to the first port satisfies the following relationship:
或者, or,
或者, or,
或者, or,
或者, or,
其中,所述为所述第一端口对应的循环移位值偏置,所述δ为第一数值,所述第一数值是根据所述SRS的发送时刻以及伪随机序列确定的,所述L为所述第一区间长度,所述K为所述第一端口对应的循环移位偏置取值粒度。Among them, the is the cyclic shift value offset corresponding to the first port, the δ is a first value, the first value is determined according to the sending time of the SRS and the pseudo-random sequence, the L is the first interval length, and the K is the granularity of the cyclic shift offset value corresponding to the first port.
可选的,L的取值范围为 Optional, the value range of L is
结合第一方面,在第一方面的某些实现方式中,所述第一端口对应的循环移位值偏置满足下述关系:In combination with the first aspect, in some implementations of the first aspect, the cyclic shift value offset corresponding to the first port satisfies the following relationship:
或者, or,
或者, or,
或者,
or,
可选的,L的取值范围为 Optional, the value range of L is
或者, or,
或者, or,
或者, or,
或者, or,
可选的,L的取值范围为 Optional, the value range of L is
各参数的含义可以参考上述实现方式,不赘述。The meaning of each parameter can be referred to the above implementation method and will not be repeated here.
结合第二方面,在第二方面的某些实现方式中,所述SRS资源的配置信息指示第一方向,所述第一方向用于确定所述第一端口对应的循环移位值偏置的正负。In combination with the second aspect, in certain implementations of the second aspect, the configuration information of the SRS resource indicates a first direction, and the first direction is used to determine the positive or negative of a cyclic shift value bias corresponding to the first port.
该方式中,网络设备向终端设备配置循环移位偏置的方向,即SRS序列在码域上的移动方向,避免终端设备循环移位采用错误的偏置方向,进一步降低了不同SRS之间干扰的可能。In this method, the network device configures the direction of the cyclic shift bias to the terminal device, that is, the direction of movement of the SRS sequence in the code domain, to avoid the terminal device using the wrong bias direction for cyclic shift, further reducing the possibility of interference between different SRSs.
结合第二方面,在第二方面的某些实现方式中,所述第一端口对应的循环移位值偏置满足下述关系:In conjunction with the second aspect, in some implementations of the second aspect, the cyclic shift value offset corresponding to the first port satisfies the following relationship:
或者, or,
或者, or,
其中,所述为所述第一端口对应的循环移位值偏置,所述δ为第一数值,所述第一数值是根据所述SRS的发送时刻以及伪随机序列确定的,所述L为所述第一区间长度,所述b的取值表示所述第一方向,所述K为所述第一端口对应的循环移位偏置取值粒度。Among them, the is the cyclic shift value offset corresponding to the first port, the δ is a first numerical value, the first numerical value is determined according to the sending time of the SRS and the pseudo-random sequence, the L is the length of the first interval, the value of b represents the first direction, and the K is the granularity of the cyclic shift offset value corresponding to the first port.
可选的,L的取值范围为 Optional, the value range of L is
结合第二方面,在第二方面的某些实现方式中,所述第一端口对应的循环移位值偏置满足下述关系:In conjunction with the second aspect, in some implementations of the second aspect, the cyclic shift value offset corresponding to the first port satisfies the following relationship:
或者, or,
或者, or,
可选的,L的取值范围为 Optional, the value range of L is
各参数的含义可以参考上述实现方式,不赘述。The meaning of each parameter can be referred to the above implementation method and will not be repeated here.
结合第二方面,在第二方面的某些实现方式中,所述SRS资源的配置信息还指示第二区间长度,所述第一取值范围的子区间长度为所述第一区间长度和第二区间长度之和。In combination with the second aspect, in some implementations of the second aspect, the configuration information of the SRS resource further indicates a second interval length, and the sub-interval length of the first value range is the sum of the first interval length and the second interval length.
也就是说,第一取值范围的子区间长度通过两个长度参数确定。That is to say, the length of the subinterval of the first value range is determined by two length parameters.
结合第二方面,在第二方面的某些实现方式中,所述第一端口对应的循环移位值偏置满足下述关系:In conjunction with the second aspect, in some implementations of the second aspect, the cyclic shift value offset corresponding to the first port satisfies the following relationship:
或者, or,
或者, or,
其中,所述为所述第一端口对应的循环移位值偏置,所述δ为第一数值,所述第一数值是根据所述SRS的发送时刻以及伪随机序列确定的,所述γ为第二数值,所述第二数值是根据所述SRS的发送时刻以及伪随机序列确定的,所述L1为所述第一区间长度,所述L2为所述第二区间长度,所述K为所述第一端口对应的循环移位偏置取值粒度。Among them, the is the cyclic shift value offset corresponding to the first port, the δ is a first value, the first value is determined according to the sending time of the SRS and the pseudo-random sequence, the γ is a second value, the second value is determined according to the sending time of the SRS and the pseudo-random sequence, the L1 is the first interval length, the L2 is the second interval length, and the K is the granularity of the cyclic shift offset value corresponding to the first port.
可选的,L1的取值范围为 Optional, L1 value range is
可选的,L2的取值范围为 Optional, L2 value range is
结合第一方面,在第一方面的某些实现方式中,所述第一端口对应的循环移位值偏置满足下述关系:In combination with the first aspect, in some implementations of the first aspect, the cyclic shift value offset corresponding to the first port satisfies the following relationship:
或者,
or,
可选的,L1的取值范围为 Optional, L1 value range is
可选的,L2的取值范围为 Optional, L2 value range is
各参数的含义可以参考上述实现方式,不赘述。The meaning of each parameter can be referred to the above implementation method and will not be repeated here.
结合第二方面,在第二方面的某些实现方式中,所述第一取值范围包括两个或两个以上所述子区间,任意两个所述子区间在时延域上不重叠。In combination with the second aspect, in certain implementations of the second aspect, the first value range includes two or more sub-intervals, and any two of the sub-intervals do not overlap in the delay domain.
应理解,本申请中的时延域可以是码域。It should be understood that the delay domain in the present application may be a code domain.
任意两个子区间在时延域上不重叠,包括两种情况,任意两个子区间在时延域上无交集,任意两个子区间在时延域上有交集。Any two sub-intervals do not overlap in the delay domain, including two cases: any two sub-intervals have no intersection in the delay domain, and any two sub-intervals have an intersection in the delay domain.
结合第二方面,在第二方面的某些实现方式中,所述SRS资源的配置信息指示第一子区间的长度和区间间隔,所述区间间隔表示所述第一取值范围内相邻两个子区间包含的值的最小值的差值的绝对值,所述第一子区间为所述两个或两个以上所述子区间中的一个。In combination with the second aspect, in certain implementations of the second aspect, the configuration information of the SRS resource indicates the length and interval interval of the first sub-interval, the interval interval represents the absolute value of the difference between the minimum values of the values contained in two adjacent sub-intervals within the first value range, and the first sub-interval is one of the two or more sub-intervals.
该方式中,扩大了端口循环移位随机化的范围,使SRS信号各端口对应的循环移位随时间在一个离散集合范围内进行变换,能够使得端口在不同时间面临不同的干扰,进一步提升了干扰随机化性能。In this method, the range of port cyclic shift randomization is expanded, so that the cyclic shift corresponding to each port of the SRS signal changes within a discrete set range over time, which can make the port face different interference at different times, further improving the interference randomization performance.
结合第二方面,在第二方面的某些实现方式中,所述第一端口对应的循环移位值偏置满足下述关系:In conjunction with the second aspect, in some implementations of the second aspect, the cyclic shift value offset corresponding to the first port satisfies the following relationship:
或者,
or,
其中,所述为所述第一端口对应的循环移位值偏置,所述δ为第一数值,所述第一数值是根据所述SRS的发送时刻以及伪随机序列确定的,所述L3为所述第一子区间的长度,所述Δ为所述区间间隔,所述K为所述第一端口对应的循环移位偏置取值粒度。Among them, the is the cyclic shift value offset corresponding to the first port, the δ is a first numerical value, the first numerical value is determined according to the sending time of the SRS and the pseudo-random sequence, the L3 is the length of the first sub-interval, the Δ is the interval, and the K is the granularity of the cyclic shift offset value corresponding to the first port.
可选的,L3的取值范围为 Optional, the value range of L3 is
结合第二方面,在第二方面的某些实现方式中,所述第一端口对应的循环移位值偏置满足下述关系:In conjunction with the second aspect, in some implementations of the second aspect, the cyclic shift value offset corresponding to the first port satisfies the following relationship:
或者,
or,
可选的,L3的取值范围为 Optional, the value range of L3 is
各参数的含义可以参考上述实现方式,不赘述。The meaning of each parameter can be referred to the above implementation method and will not be repeated here.
结合第二方面,在第二方面的某些实现方式中,所述第一端口对应的循环移位值偏置满足下述关系:In conjunction with the second aspect, in some implementations of the second aspect, the cyclic shift value offset corresponding to the first port satisfies the following relationship:
或者,
or,
其中,所述为所述第一端口对应的循环移位值偏置,所述δ为第一数值,所述第一数值是根据所述SRS的发送时刻以及伪随机序列确定的,所述b的取值表示所述第一方向,所述L3为所述第一子区间的长度,所述Δ为所述区间间隔,所述K为所述第一端口对应的循环移位偏置取值粒度。Among them, the is the cyclic shift value offset corresponding to the first port, the δ is a first numerical value, the first numerical value is determined according to the sending time of the SRS and the pseudo-random sequence, the value of b represents the first direction, the L3 is the length of the first sub-interval, the Δ is the interval, and the K is the granularity of the cyclic shift offset value corresponding to the first port.
可选的,L3的取值范围为 Optional, the value range of L3 is
结合第一方面,在第一方面的某些实现方式中,所述第一端口对应的循环移位值偏置满足下述关系:In combination with the first aspect, in some implementations of the first aspect, the cyclic shift value offset corresponding to the first port satisfies the following relationship:
或者,
or,
或者,
or,
或者, or,
或者,
or,
可选的,L3的取值范围为 Optional, the value range of L3 is
各参数的含义可以参考上述实现方式,不赘述。The meaning of each parameter can be referred to the above implementation method and will not be repeated here.
结合第二方面,在第二方面的某些实现方式中,所述SRS资源的配置信息为占用不同梳齿的端口指示不同的第一子区间的长度、区间间隔、第一方向和循环移位偏置取值粒度中的一个或多个。In combination with the second aspect, in certain implementations of the second aspect, the configuration information of the SRS resource indicates one or more of different first sub-interval lengths, interval intervals, first directions, and cyclic shift bias value granularities for ports occupying different comb teeth.
也就是说占用不同梳齿的SRS端口对应的循环移位值偏置及其取值范围可能不同。That is to say, the cyclic shift value offsets and value ranges corresponding to the SRS ports occupying different comb teeth may be different.
举例来说,所述SRS资源的配置信息为占用梳齿0的SRS端口配置了第一套参数,第一套参数包括第一子区间的长度、区间间隔、第一方向和循环移位偏置取值粒度中的一个或多个,同时为占用梳齿1的SRS配置了第二套参数,第二套参数包括第一子区间的长度、区间间隔、第一方向和循环移位偏置取值粒度中的一个或多个,而第一套参数和第二套参数不相同。For example, the configuration information of the SRS resource configures a first set of parameters for the SRS port occupying comb tooth 0, and the first set of parameters includes one or more of the length of the first sub-interval, the interval interval, the first direction, and the granularity of the cyclic shift bias value. At the same time, a second set of parameters is configured for the SRS occupying comb tooth 1, and the second set of parameters includes one or more of the length of the first sub-interval, the interval interval, the first direction, and the granularity of the cyclic shift bias value, and the first set of parameters and the second set of parameters are different.
应理解,第二方面是与第一方面对应的网络设备侧的实现方式,第一方面的相关解释、补充、可能的实现方式和有益效果的描述对第三方面同样适用,此处不再赘述。 It should be understood that the second aspect is an implementation method on the network device side corresponding to the first aspect, and the relevant explanations, supplements, possible implementation methods and descriptions of beneficial effects of the first aspect are also applicable to the third aspect and will not be repeated here.
。.
第三方面,本申请实施例提供了一种通信装置,包括用于执行第一方面,或,第一方面中任一可能的方式,或,第一方面中所有可能的方式的方法的模块。In a third aspect, an embodiment of the present application provides a communication device, comprising a module for executing the method of the first aspect, or any possible method in the first aspect, or all possible methods in the first aspect.
第四方面,本申请实施例提供了一种通信装置,包括用于执行第二方面,或,第二方面中任一可能的方式,或,第二方面中所有可能的方式的方法的模块。In a fourth aspect, an embodiment of the present application provides a communication device, comprising a module for executing the method of the second aspect, or any possible method in the second aspect, or all possible methods in the second aspect.
应理解,第三方面、第四方面是与第一方面、第二方面分别对应的装置侧的实现方式,第一方面、第二方面的相关解释、补充、可能的实现方式和有益效果的描述分别对第三方面、第四方面同样适用,此处不再赘述。It should be understood that the third aspect and the fourth aspect are implementation methods on the device side corresponding to the first aspect and the second aspect respectively. The relevant explanations, supplements, possible implementation methods and descriptions of the beneficial effects of the first aspect and the second aspect are also applicable to the third aspect and the fourth aspect respectively, and will not be repeated here.
第五方面,本申请实施例提供了一种通信装置,包括接口电路和处理器,该通信装置用于执行第一方面,或,第一方面中任一可能的方式,或,第一方面中所有可能的方式的方法。In a fifth aspect, an embodiment of the present application provides a communication device, comprising an interface circuit and a processor, wherein the communication device is used to execute the method of the first aspect, or any possible method in the first aspect, or all possible methods in the first aspect.
第六方面,本申请实施例提供了一种通信装置,包括接口电路和处理器,该通信装置用于执行第二方面,或,第二方面中任一可能的方式,或,第二方面中所有可能的方式的方法。In a sixth aspect, an embodiment of the present application provides a communication device, comprising an interface circuit and a processor, wherein the communication device is used to execute the method of the second aspect, or any possible method in the second aspect, or all possible methods in the second aspect.
第七方面,本申请实施例提供了一种计算机可读介质,该计算机可读介质存储用于终端设备执行的程序代码,该程序代码包括用于执行第一方面或第二方面,或,第一方面或第二方面中任一可能的方式,或,第一方面或第二方面中所有可能的方式的方法的指令。In the seventh aspect, an embodiment of the present application provides a computer-readable medium storing a program code for execution on a terminal device, the program code comprising instructions for executing the method of the first aspect or the second aspect, or any possible manner in the first aspect or the second aspect, or all possible manners in the first aspect or the second aspect.
第八方面,本申请实施例提供了一种计算机可读介质,该计算机可读介质存储用于网络设备执行的程序代码,该程序代码包括用于执行第一方面或第二方面,或,第一方面或第二方面中任一可能的方式,或,第一方面或第二方面中所有可能的方式的方法的指令。In an eighth aspect, an embodiment of the present application provides a computer-readable medium storing a program code for execution by a network device, the program code comprising instructions for executing the method of the first aspect or the second aspect, or any possible manner in the first aspect or the second aspect, or all possible manners in the first aspect or the second aspect.
第九方面,提供了一种存储有计算机可读指令的计算机程序产品,当该计算机可读指令在计算机上运行时,使得计算机执行第一方面,或,第一方面中任一可能的方式,或,第一方面中所有可能的方式的方法。In the ninth aspect, a computer program product storing computer-readable instructions is provided, which, when the computer-readable instructions are executed on a computer, causes the computer to execute the method of the first aspect, or any possible manner of the first aspect, or all possible manners of the first aspect.
第十方面,提供了一种存储有计算机可读令的计算机程序产品,当该计算机可读指令在计算机上运行时,使得计算机执行上述第二方面,或,第二方面中任一可能的方式,或,第二方面中所有可能的方式的方法。In the tenth aspect, a computer program product storing computer-readable instructions is provided, which, when the computer-readable instructions are executed on a computer, enables the computer to execute the method of the above-mentioned second aspect, or any possible method of the second aspect, or all possible methods of the second aspect.
第十一方面,提供了一种通信系统,该通信系统包括具有实现上述第一方面,或,第一方面中任一可能的方式,或,第一方面中所有可能的方式的方法及各种可能设计的功能的装置和第二方面,或,第二方面中任一可能的方式,或,第二方面中所有可能的方式的方法及各种可能设计的功能的装置。In the eleventh aspect, a communication system is provided, which includes a device having a method for implementing the above-mentioned first aspect, or any possible manner in the first aspect, or all possible manners in the first aspect, and various possible designed functions, and a device having the second aspect, or any possible manner in the second aspect, or all possible manners in the second aspect, and various possible designed functions.
第十二方面,提供了一种处理器,用于与存储器耦合,用于执行上述第一方面,或,第一方面中任一可能的方式,或,第一方面中所有可能的方式的方法。In a twelfth aspect, a processor is provided, which is coupled to a memory and is used to execute the method of the above-mentioned first aspect, or any possible manner in the first aspect, or all possible manners in the first aspect.
第十三方面,提供了一种处理器,用于与存储器耦合,用于执行第二方面,或,第二方面中任一可能的方式,或,第二方面中所有可能的方式的方法。In the thirteenth aspect, a processor is provided, which is coupled to a memory and is used to execute the method of the second aspect, or any possible manner of the second aspect, or all possible manners of the second aspect.
第十四方面,提供一种芯片系统,该芯片系统包括处理器,还可以包括存储器,用于执行该存储器中存储的计算机程序或指令,使得芯片系统实现前述第一方面或第二方面中任一方面、以及任一方面的任意可能的实现方式中的方法。该芯片系统可以由芯片构成,也可以包含芯片和其他分立器件。In a fourteenth aspect, a chip system is provided, the chip system includes a processor and may also include a memory for executing a computer program or instruction stored in the memory, so that the chip system implements the method in any of the first aspect or the second aspect, and any possible implementation of any aspect. The chip system may be composed of a chip, or may include a chip and other discrete devices.
第十五方面,提供一种通信系统,包括至少一个如第三方面所述的通信装置和/或至少一个如第四方面所述的通信装置,该通信系统用于实现上述第一方面或第二方面,或,第一方面或第二方面中任一可能的方式,或,第一方面或第二方面中所有可能的实现方式的方法。In the fifteenth aspect, a communication system is provided, comprising at least one communication device as described in the third aspect and/or at least one communication device as described in the fourth aspect, and the communication system is used to implement the above-mentioned first aspect or second aspect, or any possible manner in the first aspect or second aspect, or all possible implementation methods in the first aspect or second aspect.
图1是本申请实施例适用的通信系统100的示意图。FIG. 1 is a schematic diagram of a communication system 100 to which an embodiment of the present application is applicable.
图2是三种不同梳齿数量时的一把梳齿的示意图。FIG. 2 is a schematic diagram of a comb with three different numbers of comb teeth.
图3是一种发送带宽和跳频带宽的示意图。FIG. 3 is a schematic diagram of a transmission bandwidth and a frequency hopping bandwidth.
图4示出了一种多网络设备联合传输的场景示意图。FIG. 4 shows a schematic diagram of a scenario of joint transmission of multiple network devices.
图5示出了一种SRS在时延域上的分布示意图。FIG5 shows a schematic diagram of SRS distribution in the delay domain.
图6示出了又一种SRS在时延域上的分布示意图。FIG6 shows a schematic diagram of yet another distribution of SRS in the delay domain.
图7示出了又一种SRS在时延域上的分布示意图。FIG. 7 shows a schematic diagram of yet another distribution of SRS in the delay domain.
图8示出了又一种SRS在时延域上的分布示意图。FIG8 shows a schematic diagram of yet another distribution of SRS in the delay domain.
图9示出了一种通信方法的示意图。 FIG. 9 shows a schematic diagram of a communication method.
图10示出了一种SRS在时延域上的分布示意图。FIG. 10 shows a schematic diagram of SRS distribution in the delay domain.
图11示出了又一种SRS在时延域上的分布示意图。FIG. 11 shows a schematic diagram of yet another distribution of SRS in the delay domain.
图12示出了又一种SRS在时延域上的分布示意图。FIG. 12 shows a schematic diagram of yet another distribution of SRS in the delay domain.
图13示出了本申请提出的通信装置1300的示意图。FIG13 shows a schematic diagram of a communication device 1300 proposed in this application.
图14示出了适用于本申请实施例的终端设备1400的结构示意图。FIG. 14 shows a schematic structural diagram of a terminal device 1400 applicable to an embodiment of the present application.
图15示出了本申请提出的通信装置1500的示意图。FIG. 15 shows a schematic diagram of a communication device 1500 proposed in this application.
图16示出了适用于本申请实施例的网络设备1600的结构示意图。FIG. 16 shows a schematic diagram of the structure of a network device 1600 applicable to an embodiment of the present application.
图17示出了又一种SRS在时延域上的分布示意图。FIG. 17 shows a schematic diagram of yet another distribution of SRS in the delay domain.
图18示出了又一种SRS在时延域上的分布示意图。FIG. 18 shows a schematic diagram of yet another distribution of SRS in the delay domain.
图19示出了又一种SRS在时延域上的分布示意图。FIG. 19 shows a schematic diagram of yet another distribution of SRS in the delay domain.
图20示出了又一种SRS在时延域上的分布示意图。FIG. 20 shows a schematic diagram of yet another distribution of SRS in the delay domain.
图21示出了又一种SRS在时延域上的分布示意图。FIG. 21 shows a schematic diagram of yet another distribution of SRS in the delay domain.
图22示出了又一种SRS在时延域上的分布示意图。FIG. 22 shows a schematic diagram of yet another distribution of SRS in the delay domain.
图23示出了又一种SRS在时延域上的分布示意图。FIG. 23 shows a schematic diagram of yet another distribution of SRS in the delay domain.
图24示出了又一种SRS在时延域上的分布示意图。FIG. 24 shows a schematic diagram of yet another distribution of SRS in the delay domain.
下面将结合附图,对本申请中的技术方案进行描述。The technical solution in this application will be described below in conjunction with the accompanying drawings.
本申请实施例的技术方案可以应用于各种通信系统,例如:第五代(5th generation,5G)系统或新无线(new radio,NR)、长期演进(long term evolution,LTE)系统、LTE频分双工(frequency division duplex,FDD)系统、LTE时分双工(time division duplex,TDD)等。本申请提供的技术方案还可以应用于未来的通信系统,如第六代移动通信系统。本申请实施例的技术方案还可以应用于设备到设备(device to device,D2D)通信,车辆外联(vehicle-to-everything,V2X)通信,机器到机器(machine to machine,M2M)通信,机器类型通信(machine type communication,MTC),以及物联网(internet of things,IoT)通信系统或者其他通信系统。The technical solutions of the embodiments of the present application can be applied to various communication systems, such as: the fifth generation (5th generation, 5G) system or new radio (new radio, NR), long term evolution (long term evolution, LTE) system, LTE frequency division duplex (frequency division duplex, FDD) system, LTE time division duplex (time division duplex, TDD), etc. The technical solutions provided in the present application can also be applied to future communication systems, such as the sixth generation mobile communication system. The technical solutions of the embodiments of the present application can also be applied to device to device (device to device, D2D) communication, vehicle-to-everything (vehicle-to-everything, V2X) communication, machine to machine (machine to machine, M2M) communication, machine type communication (machine type communication, MTC), and Internet of things (internet of things, IoT) communication system or other communication systems.
本申请实施例中的终端设备(terminal equipment)可以指接入终端、用户单元、用户站、移动站、移动台、中继站、远方站、远程终端、移动设备、用户终端(user terminal)、用户设备(user equipment,UE)、终端(terminal)、无线通信设备、用户代理或用户装置。终端设备还可以是蜂窝电话、无绳电话、会话启动协议(session initiation protocol,SIP)电话、无线本地环路(wireless local loop,WLL)站、个人数字助理(personal digital assistant,PDA)、具有无线通信功能的手持设备、计算设备或连接到无线调制解调器的其它处理设备、车载设备、可穿戴设备,未来5G网络中的终端设备或者未来演进的公用陆地移动通信网络(public land mobile network,PLMN)中的终端设备等,本申请实施例对此并不限定。The terminal equipment in the embodiments of the present application may refer to an access terminal, a user unit, a user station, a mobile station, a mobile station, a relay station, a remote station, a remote terminal, a mobile device, a user terminal, a user equipment (UE), a terminal, a wireless communication device, a user agent or a user device. The terminal equipment may also be a cellular phone, a cordless phone, a session initiation protocol (SIP) phone, a wireless local loop (WLL) station, a personal digital assistant (PDA), a handheld device with wireless communication function, a computing device or other processing device connected to a wireless modem, a vehicle-mounted device, a wearable device, a terminal device in a future 5G network or a terminal device in a future evolved public land mobile network (PLMN), etc., and the embodiments of the present application are not limited to this.
作为示例而非限定,在本申请实施例中,可穿戴设备也可以称为穿戴式智能设备,是应用穿戴式技术对日常穿戴进行智能化设计、开发出可以穿戴的设备的总称,如眼镜、手套、手表、服饰及鞋等。可穿戴设备即直接穿在身上,或是整合到用户的衣服或配件的一种便携式设备。可穿戴设备不仅仅是一种硬件设备,更是通过软件支持以及数据交互、云端交互来实现强大的功能。广义穿戴式智能设备包括功能全、尺寸大、可不依赖智能手机实现完整或者部分的功能,例如:智能手表或智能眼镜等,以及只专注于某一类应用功能,需要和其它设备如智能手机配合使用,如各类进行体征监测的智能手环、智能首饰等。As an example and not a limitation, in the embodiments of the present application, wearable devices may also be referred to as wearable smart devices, which are a general term for wearable devices that are intelligently designed and developed by applying wearable technology to daily wear, such as glasses, gloves, watches, clothing, and shoes. A wearable device is a portable device that is worn directly on the body or integrated into the user's clothes or accessories. Wearable devices are not only hardware devices, but also achieve powerful functions through software support, data interaction, and cloud interaction. Broadly speaking, wearable smart devices include full-featured, large-sized, and independent of smartphones to achieve complete or partial functions, such as smart watches or smart glasses, as well as devices that only focus on a certain type of application function and need to be used in conjunction with other devices such as smartphones, such as various types of smart bracelets and smart jewelry for vital sign monitoring.
此外,在本申请实施例中,终端设备还可以是IoT系统中的终端设备,IoT是未来信息技术发展的重要组成部分,其主要技术特点是将物品通过通信技术与网络连接,从而实现人机互连,物物互连的智能化网络。在本申请实施例中,IOT技术可以通过例如窄带(narrow band,NB)技术,做到海量连接,深度覆盖,终端省电。In addition, in the embodiment of the present application, the terminal device can also be a terminal device in an IoT system. IoT is an important part of the future development of information technology. Its main technical feature is to connect objects to the network through communication technology, thereby realizing an intelligent network of human-machine interconnection and object-to-object interconnection. In the embodiment of the present application, IOT technology can achieve massive connections, deep coverage, and terminal power saving through narrowband (NB) technology, for example.
本申请实施例中的网络设备可以是用于与终端设备通信的任意一种具有无线收发功能的设备。该设备包括但不限于:演进型节点B(evolved Node B,eNB)、无线网络控制器(radio network controller,RNC)、节点B(Node B,NB)、基站控制器(base station controller,BSC)、基站收发台(base transceiver station,BTS)、家庭基站(home evolved NodeB,HeNB,或home Node B,HNB)、基带单元(baseBand unit,BBU),无线保真(wireless fidelity,WIFI)系统中的接入点(access point,AP)、 无线中继节点、无线回传节点、传输点(transmission point,TP)或者发送接收点(transmission and reception point,TRP)等,还可以为5G,如,NR,系统中的gNB,或,传输点(TRP或TP),5G系统中的基站的一个或一组(包括多个天线面板)天线面板,或者,还可以为构成gNB或传输点的网络节点,如基带单元(BBU),或,分布式单元(distributed unit,DU)等。The network device in the embodiment of the present application can be any device with wireless transceiver function for communicating with the terminal device. The device includes but is not limited to: evolved Node B (eNB), radio network controller (RNC), Node B (NB), base station controller (BSC), base transceiver station (BTS), home evolved NodeB (HeNB, or home Node B, HNB), baseband unit (BBU), access point (AP) in wireless fidelity (WIFI) system, A wireless relay node, a wireless backhaul node, a transmission point (TP) or a transmission and reception point (TRP), etc., can also be a gNB in a 5G, such as NR, system, or a transmission point (TRP or TP), one or a group of (including multiple antenna panels) antenna panels of a base station in a 5G system, or a network node constituting a gNB or a transmission point, such as a baseband unit (BBU), or a distributed unit (DU), etc.
在一些部署中,gNB可以包括集中式单元(centralized unit,CU)和DU。gNB还可以包括有源天线单元(active antenna unit,AAU)。CU实现gNB的部分功能,DU实现gNB的部分功能。比如,CU负责处理非实时协议和服务,实现无线资源控制(radio resource control,RRC),分组数据汇聚层协议(packet data convergence protocol,PDCP)层的功能。DU负责处理物理层协议和实时服务,实现无线链路控制(radio link control,RLC)层、媒体接入控制(media access control,MAC)层和物理(physical,PHY)层的功能。AAU实现部分物理层处理功能、射频处理及有源天线的相关功能。由于RRC层的信息最终会变成PHY层的信息,或者,由PHY层的信息转变而来,因而,在这种架构下,高层信令,如RRC层信令,也可以认为是由DU发送的,或者,由DU+AAU发送的。可以理解的是,网络设备可以为包括CU节点、DU节点、AAU节点中一项或多项的设备。此外,可以将CU划分为接入网(radio access network,RAN)中的网络设备,也可以将CU划分为核心网(core network,CN)中的网络设备,本申请对此不做限定。In some deployments, the gNB may include a centralized unit (CU) and a DU. The gNB may also include an active antenna unit (AAU). The CU implements some functions of the gNB, and the DU implements some functions of the gNB. For example, the CU is responsible for processing non-real-time protocols and services, and implements the functions of the radio resource control (RRC) and packet data convergence protocol (PDCP) layers. The DU is responsible for processing physical layer protocols and real-time services, and implements the functions of the radio link control (RLC), media access control (MAC) and physical (PHY) layers. The AAU implements some physical layer processing functions, RF processing and related functions of active antennas. Since the information of the RRC layer will eventually become the information of the PHY layer, or be converted from the information of the PHY layer, in this architecture, high-level signaling, such as RRC layer signaling, can also be considered to be sent by the DU, or by the DU+AAU. It is understandable that the network device may be a device including one or more of a CU node, a DU node, and an AAU node. In addition, the CU may be classified as a network device in an access network (radio access network, RAN), or the CU may be classified as a network device in a core network (core network, CN), and this application does not limit this.
在本申请实施例中,终端设备或网络设备包括硬件层、运行在硬件层之上的操作系统层,以及运行在操作系统层上的应用层。该硬件层包括中央处理器(central processing unit,CPU)、内存管理单元(memory management unit,MMU)和内存(也称为主存)等硬件。该操作系统可以是任意一种或多种通过进程(process)实现业务处理的计算机操作系统,例如,Linux操作系统、Unix操作系统、Android操作系统、iOS操作系统或windows操作系统等。该应用层包含浏览器、通讯录、文字处理软件、即时通信软件等应用。并且,本申请实施例并未对本申请实施例提供的方法的执行主体的具体结构特别限定,只要能够通过运行记录有本申请实施例的提供的方法的代码的程序,以根据本申请实施例提供的方法进行通信即可,例如,本申请实施例提供的方法的执行主体可以是终端设备或网络设备,或者,是终端设备或网络设备中能够调用程序并执行程序的功能模块。In the embodiment of the present application, the terminal device or network device includes a hardware layer, an operating system layer running on the hardware layer, and an application layer running on the operating system layer. The hardware layer includes hardware such as a central processing unit (CPU), a memory management unit (MMU), and a memory (also called main memory). The operating system can be any one or more computer operating systems that implement business processing through a process, such as a Linux operating system, a Unix operating system, an Android operating system, an iOS operating system, or a Windows operating system. The application layer includes applications such as a browser, an address book, a word processing software, and an instant messaging software. In addition, the embodiment of the present application does not specifically limit the specific structure of the execution subject of the method provided in the embodiment of the present application. As long as it is possible to communicate according to the method provided in the embodiment of the present application by running a program that records the code of the method provided in the embodiment of the present application, for example, the execution subject of the method provided in the embodiment of the present application can be a terminal device or a network device, or a functional module in the terminal device or the network device that can call and execute a program.
另外,本申请的各个方面或特征可以实现成方法、装置或使用标准编程和/或工程技术的制品。本申请中使用的术语“制品”涵盖可从任何计算机可读器件、载体或介质访问的计算机程序。例如,计算机可读介质可以包括,但不限于:磁存储器件(例如,硬盘、软盘或磁带等),光盘(例如,压缩盘(compact disc,CD)、数字通用盘(digital versatiledisc,DVD)等),智能卡和闪存器件(例如,可擦写可编程只读存储器(erasable programmable read-only memory,EPROM)、卡、棒或钥匙驱动器等)。另外,本文描述的各种存储介质可代表用于存储信息的一个或多个设备和/或其它机器可读介质。术语“机器可读存储介质”可包括但不限于,无线信道和能够存储、包含和/或承载指令和/或数据的各种其它介质。In addition, various aspects or features of the present application can be implemented as methods, devices or products using standard programming and/or engineering techniques. The term "product" used in this application covers computer programs that can be accessed from any computer-readable device, carrier or medium. For example, computer-readable media may include, but are not limited to: magnetic storage devices (e.g., hard disks, floppy disks or tapes, etc.), optical disks (e.g., compact discs (CDs), digital versatile discs (DVDs), etc.), smart cards and flash memory devices (e.g., erasable programmable read-only memory (EPROM), cards, sticks or key drives, etc.). In addition, the various storage media described herein may represent one or more devices and/or other machine-readable media for storing information. The term "machine-readable storage medium" may include, but is not limited to, wireless channels and various other media capable of storing, containing and/or carrying instructions and/or data.
为便于理解本申请实施例,首先以图1中示出的通信系统为例详细说明本申请实施例适用的通信系统。图1是本申请实施例适用的通信系统100的示意图。如图1所示,该通信系统100可以包括至少一个网络设备,例如图1所示的网络设备110;该通信系统100还可以包括至少一个终端设备,例如图1所示的终端设备120,例如图1所示的终端设备130,其中,探测参考信号(sounding reference signal,SRS)。网络设备110与终端设备120和终端设备130可通过无线链路通信。各通信设备,如网络设备110、终端设备120或终端设备130,均可以配置多个天线。对于该通信系统100中的每一个通信设备而言,所配置的多个天线可以包括至少一个用于发送信号的发射天线和至少一个用于接收信号的接收天线。因此,该通信系统100中的各通信设备之间,如网络设备110与终端设备120之间,可通过多天线技术通信;还如网络设备110与终端设备130之间,可通过多天线技术通信。To facilitate understanding of the embodiments of the present application, the communication system to which the embodiments of the present application are applicable is first described in detail by taking the communication system shown in FIG. 1 as an example. FIG. 1 is a schematic diagram of a communication system 100 to which the embodiments of the present application are applicable. As shown in FIG. 1 , the communication system 100 may include at least one network device, such as the network device 110 shown in FIG. 1 ; the communication system 100 may also include at least one terminal device, such as the terminal device 120 shown in FIG. 1 , such as the terminal device 130 shown in FIG. 1 , wherein a sounding reference signal (SRS) is detected. The network device 110 may communicate with the terminal device 120 and the terminal device 130 via a wireless link. Each communication device, such as the network device 110, the terminal device 120 or the terminal device 130, may be configured with multiple antennas. For each communication device in the communication system 100, the configured multiple antennas may include at least one transmitting antenna for sending signals and at least one receiving antenna for receiving signals. Therefore, the communication devices in the communication system 100, such as the network device 110 and the terminal device 120, can communicate through the multi-antenna technology; and the network device 110 and the terminal device 130 can communicate through the multi-antenna technology.
应理解,图1是以网络设备与终端设备通信为例,简单说明本申请能够应用的一个通信场景,不同天线端口通过循环移位(cyclic shift,CS)实现码域资源的复用。图1场景为示例性的描述,不对本申请可以应用的其他场景产生限制。It should be understood that FIG1 is an example of communication between a network device and a terminal device, which simply illustrates a communication scenario to which the present application can be applied, and different antenna ports implement code domain resource reuse through cyclic shift (CS). The scenario in FIG1 is an exemplary description and does not limit other scenarios to which the present application can be applied.
还应理解,图1仅为便于理解而示例的简化示意图,该通信系统100中还可以包括其他网络设备或者还可以包括其他终端设备,图1中未予以画出。It should also be understood that FIG. 1 is only a simplified schematic diagram for ease of understanding, and the communication system 100 may also include other network devices or other terminal devices, which are not shown in FIG. 1 .
为了便于理解本申请实施例的技术方案,首先对本申请实施例可能涉及到的一些术语或概念进行简单描述。In order to facilitate understanding of the technical solutions of the embodiments of the present application, some terms or concepts that may be involved in the embodiments of the present application are first briefly described.
1、参考信号(reference signal,RS)。 1. Reference signal (RS)
参考信号也可以称为导频(pilot)或参考序列等。在本申请实施例中,参考信号可以是用于信道测量的参考信号。例如,该参考信号可以是用于上行信道测量的SRS。例如,该参考信号可以是用于上行信道测量的导频。或者,该参考信号可以是用于定位测量的SRS。应理解,上文列举的参考信号仅为示例,不应对本申请构成任何限定。本申请并不排除在未来的协议中定义其他参考信号以实现相同或相似功能的可能,也不排除在未来的协议中定义其他参考信号实现不同功能的可能。The reference signal may also be referred to as a pilot or a reference sequence, etc. In an embodiment of the present application, the reference signal may be a reference signal for channel measurement. For example, the reference signal may be an SRS for uplink channel measurement. For example, the reference signal may be a pilot for uplink channel measurement. Alternatively, the reference signal may be an SRS for positioning measurement. It should be understood that the reference signals listed above are only examples and should not constitute any limitation to the present application. The present application does not exclude the possibility of defining other reference signals in future protocols to achieve the same or similar functions, nor does it exclude the possibility of defining other reference signals in future protocols to achieve different functions.
为了便于描述,下文中以参考信号为SRS为例进行说明。在5G NR通信系统中,SRS用于估计不同频段的信道质量。SRS是一种终端设备向接入网设备(例如基站)发送的上行参考信号。接入网设备根据终端设备发送的SRS获取该终端设备的UL信道。或者,接入网设备根据信道互易性获取该终端设备的DL信道,从而根据该DL信道对该终端设备做数据调度。下文中的UE和/或用户可视为终端设备。For ease of description, the following description takes the reference signal SRS as an example. In the 5G NR communication system, SRS is used to estimate the channel quality of different frequency bands. SRS is an uplink reference signal sent by a terminal device to an access network device (such as a base station). The access network device obtains the UL channel of the terminal device based on the SRS sent by the terminal device. Alternatively, the access network device obtains the DL channel of the terminal device based on channel reciprocity, thereby scheduling data for the terminal device based on the DL channel. The UE and/or user in the following description can be regarded as a terminal device.
2、循环移位(cyclic shift,CS):在SRS资源中,CS用来区分不同的码域资源,SRS资源通过为不同端口分配不同的CS实现端口间的码分复用。具体来说,循环移位是作用在发送序列上的,因发送序列特性,给发送序列施加循环移位等价于信号在时延域上进行偏移,不同信号偏移不同时,就达到了复用的效果。2. Cyclic shift (CS): In SRS resources, CS is used to distinguish different code domain resources. SRS resources implement code division multiplexing between ports by assigning different CS to different ports. Specifically, cyclic shift acts on the transmission sequence. Due to the characteristics of the transmission sequence, applying cyclic shift to the transmission sequence is equivalent to shifting the signal in the delay domain. When different signals have different shifts, the multiplexing effect is achieved.
3、SRS序列生成。3. SRS sequence generation.
SRS序列由基序列和循环移位(cyclic shift,CS)得到:
SRS Sequence By base sequence And cyclic shift (CS) to get:
其中,MZC为序列长度;基序列由组索引u={0,1,...,29}和组内基序列索引v以及序列长度MZC定义。在基序列相同条件下,不同SRS序列通过不同CS区分,且不同CS对应的SRS序列正交,α为循环移位,j是虚数单位。Among them, M ZC is the sequence length; base sequence It is defined by the group index u = {0, 1, ..., 29} and the base sequence index v within the group and the sequence length M ZC . Under the same conditions, different SRS sequences are distinguished by different CSs, and the SRS sequences corresponding to different CSs are orthogonal, α is the cyclic shift, and j is the imaginary unit.
4、SRS资源。4. SRS resources.
SRS资源,即SRS resource,传输SRS的时域资源,频域资源,空域资源中的一种或多种。示例性地,时域资源可以符号、子帧、时隙等时间单元,频域资源可以指子载波、RB、RE或RG等频域位置,空域资源可以指天线端口或码字等空间域。SRS resource, i.e., SRS resource, is one or more of the time domain resources, frequency domain resources, and spatial domain resources for transmitting SRS. For example, the time domain resources may be time units such as symbols, subframes, and time slots, the frequency domain resources may refer to frequency domain positions such as subcarriers, RBs, REs, or RGs, and the spatial domain resources may refer to spatial domains such as antenna ports or codewords.
SRS资源由无线资源控制(radio resource control,RRC)IE SRS-Resource或SRS-PosResource配置,其中,SRS-PosResource用于定位场景。相同终端相同时刻最多可以激活一个SRS resource set,一个SRS resource set可以包含一个或多个SRS resource,多个SRS resource通过resource ID来区分。不同终端设备配置SRS resource不同。SRS resources are configured by radio resource control (RRC) IE SRS-Resource or SRS-PosResource, where SRS-PosResource is used for positioning scenarios. The same terminal can activate at most one SRS resource set at the same time. An SRS resource set can contain one or more SRS resources. Multiple SRS resources are distinguished by resource IDs. Different terminal devices configure SRS resources differently.
SRS与SRS resource的关系:一个SRS在一个SRS resource上发送,一个SRS对应一个或多个天线端口,每个天线端口对应一个SRS序列。或者说,一个SRS对应一个或多个SRS序列,这些序列在不同的天线端口上发送。The relationship between SRS and SRS resource: one SRS is sent on one SRS resource, one SRS corresponds to one or more antenna ports, and each antenna port corresponds to an SRS sequence. In other words, one SRS corresponds to one or more SRS sequences, which are sent on different antenna ports.
5、SRS资源的CS配置规则。5. CS configuration rules for SRS resources.
对于特定SRS资源,对应SRS序列为:
For a specific SRS resource, the corresponding SRS sequence is:
其中,MZC为SRS序列长度,由RRC配置参数确定,为一个SRS resource所占的连续OFDM符号数量,由RRC参数nrofSymbols配置。δ=log2(KTC),KTC∈{2,4,8}为复用的comb数,对应配置参数包含在RRC参数transmissionComb内。天线端口pi对应的CS的循环移位值αi为
Wherein, M ZC is the SRS sequence length, which is determined by the RRC configuration parameters. is the number of consecutive OFDM symbols occupied by an SRS resource, which is configured by the RRC parameter nrofSymbols. δ=log 2 (K TC ), K TC ∈{2,4,8} is the number of multiplexed combs, and the corresponding configuration parameters are included in the RRC parameter transmissionComb. The cyclic shift value α i of the CS corresponding to antenna port p i is
其中,pi可以理解为天线端口i的序号,对应配置参数包含在RRC参数transmissionComb内,MIMO场景下对应最大CS个数由下表1指示。Among them, p i can be understood as the serial number of antenna port i, The corresponding configuration parameters are included in the RRC parameter transmissionComb, which corresponds to the maximum number of CSs in the MIMO scenario. As indicated in Table 1 below.
表1 comb数与最大CS个数的关系
Table 1 Relationship between comb number and maximum number of CSs
其中,KTC=8,只在用于定位功能的RRC信令SRS-PosResource-r16内配置,对于其他功能的RRC 信令SRS-Resource,只支持KTC=28和KTC=4两种配置。Among them, K TC = 8, which is only configured in the RRC signaling SRS-PosResource-r16 for positioning function. Signaling SRS-Resource only supports two configurations: K TC = 28 and K TC = 4.
5、天线端口序号pi。5. Antenna port number pi .
SRS资源由接入网设备(例如基站)通过高层参数半静态配置,包括:SRS resources are semi-statically configured by access network equipment (e.g., base stations) through high-level parameters, including:
个SRS端口(antenna port)每个SRS端口会对应特定的时频码资源。在理想情况下,各个SRS端口是正交的。每个SRS端口会对应终端设备的物理天线或者虚拟天线。 SRS ports (antenna ports) Each SRS port corresponds to a specific time-frequency code resource. Ideally, each SRS port is orthogonal. Each SRS port corresponds to a physical antenna or a virtual antenna of a terminal device.
6、SRS的梳齿(comb):一把SRS的梳齿上的频域子载波呈等间隔分布,梳齿数量KTC∈{2,4,8}由接入网设备(下文以基站为例)通过高层参数半静态配置,其决定了SRS发送带宽中包含的梳齿数量。图2为本申请提供的三种不同梳齿数量时的一把梳齿的示例。图2中,每个格子表示一个资源元素(resource element,RE),黑色格子是不同梳齿数量时的一把梳齿占用的RE位置的示例。一次SRS发送对应一个SRS资源内的连续R个正交频分多路复用(orthogonal frequency division multiplexing,OFDM)符号。重复因子R∈{1,2,4}由基站通过高层参数repetitionFactor半静态的配置。6. SRS comb: The frequency domain subcarriers on the comb teeth of an SRS are equally spaced, and the number of comb teeth K TC ∈{2,4,8} is semi-statically configured by the access network device (the base station is taken as an example below) through high-level parameters, which determines the number of comb teeth contained in the SRS transmission bandwidth. Figure 2 is an example of a comb with three different numbers of comb teeth provided in this application. In Figure 2, each grid represents a resource element (RE), and the black grid is an example of the RE position occupied by a comb with different numbers of comb teeth. One SRS transmission corresponds to R consecutive orthogonal frequency division multiplexing (OFDM) symbols within an SRS resource. The repetition factor R∈{1,2,4} is semi-statically configured by the base station through the high-level parameter repetitionFactor.
7、SRS的发送带宽、跳频带宽及跳频周期:SRS的发送带宽、跳频带宽及跳频周期是根据高层参数及协议预定义表格确定的。当基站没有配置频率缩放因子PF时,SRS发送带宽为基站根据SRS获取的信道对应的带宽范围,SRS跳频带宽为单次SRS发送后基站获取的信道对应的带宽范围,跳频带宽小于等于扫描带宽,跳频周期为基站获取发送带宽对应的信道所需要的SRS发送次数;当基站通过高层参数配置了频率缩放因子PF时,SRS的发送带宽、跳频带宽及跳频周期不变,但由于单次SRS发送的带宽变为原先的1/PF,这种情况下发送带宽为基站根据SRS获取的信道对应的带宽范围的PF倍,SRS跳频带宽为单次SRS发送后基站获取的信道对应的带宽范围的PF倍。图3为本申请实施例提供的一种发送带宽和跳频带宽的示例。图3中,每个格子在频域上表示一个资源块(resource block,RB),SRS的带宽为16RB,跳频带宽为4RB,跳频周期为4,图3中的(a)对应没有配置PF,图3中的(b)配置了PF=2。7. SRS transmission bandwidth, frequency hopping bandwidth and frequency hopping period: The transmission bandwidth, frequency hopping bandwidth and frequency hopping period of SRS are determined according to high-level parameters and protocol predefined tables. When the base station is not configured with the frequency scaling factor PF , the SRS transmission bandwidth is the bandwidth range corresponding to the channel obtained by the base station according to the SRS, the SRS frequency hopping bandwidth is the bandwidth range corresponding to the channel obtained by the base station after a single SRS transmission, the frequency hopping bandwidth is less than or equal to the scanning bandwidth, and the frequency hopping period is the number of SRS transmissions required for the base station to obtain the channel corresponding to the transmission bandwidth; when the base station configures the frequency scaling factor PF through high-level parameters, the transmission bandwidth, frequency hopping bandwidth and frequency hopping period of SRS remain unchanged, but because the bandwidth of a single SRS transmission becomes the original 1/ PF , in this case, the transmission bandwidth is PF times the bandwidth range corresponding to the channel obtained by the base station according to the SRS, and the SRS frequency hopping bandwidth is PF times the bandwidth range corresponding to the channel obtained by the base station after a single SRS transmission. Figure 3 is an example of a transmission bandwidth and frequency hopping bandwidth provided in an embodiment of the present application. In FIG3 , each grid represents a resource block (RB) in the frequency domain, the SRS bandwidth is 16 RB, the frequency hopping bandwidth is 4 RB, and the frequency hopping period is 4. (a) in FIG3 corresponds to no PF configuration, and (b) in FIG3 corresponds to PF = 2 configuration.
8、伪随机序列:一种伪随机序列的示例:8. Pseudo-random sequence: An example of a pseudo-random sequence:
长度为MPN的伪随机序列c(n)的定义为:
c(n)=(x1(n+NC)+x2(n+NC))mod 2
x1(n+31)=(x1(n+3)+x1(n))mod 2
x2(n+31)=(x2(n+3)+x2(n+2)+x2(n+1)+x2(n))mod 2The pseudo-random sequence c(n) of length M PN is defined as:
c(n)=(x 1 (n+ NC )+x 2 (n+ NC ))mod 2
x 1 (n+31)=(x 1 (n+3)+x 1 (n))mod 2
x 2 (n+31)=(x 2 (n+3)+x 2 (n+2)+x 2 (n+1)+x 2 (n))mod 2
其中,Nc=1600,第一个M序列x1(n)的初始化为:x1(0)=1;x1(n)=0,n=1,2,……,30;Wherein, N c = 1600, the initialization of the first M sequence x 1 (n) is: x 1 (0) = 1; x 1 (n) = 0, n = 1, 2, ..., 30;
第二个M序列x2(n)的初始化为:Cinit为初始化参数。The second M sequence x 2 (n) is initialized as: C init is the initialization parameter.
图4示出了一种多网络设备联合传输的场景示意图。FIG. 4 shows a schematic diagram of a scenario of joint transmission of multiple network devices.
如图4,网络设备以TRP1和TRP2为例,终端设备以UE1和UE2为例。TRP1和TRP2共同服务UE1且TRP1和TRP2对UE1发送数据,则,TRP1和TRP2需要预先获取UE1到TRP1和TRP2的信道。通过配置一个SRS资源(SRS resource 1),UE1在SRS resource 1上发送SRS信号,TRP1和TRP2都在该资源上接收来自UE1的SRS信号,从而分别获取各自的信道。TRP1和TRP2共同服务的还有UE2,与服务UE1同理,TRP1和TRP2需要预先获取UE2到TRP1和TRP2的信道,通过配置一个SRS资源(SRS resource 2),UE2在SRS resource 2上发送SRS信号,TRP1和TRP2都在该资源上接收来自UE2的SRS信号,从而分别获取各自的信道。可以看到,对于一个UE,仅需要一个SRS资源,就可以使得多个TRP同时获取到该UE的信道。为了能够同时服务UE1和UE2,通常SRS1和SRS2会被配置为相同的基序列且占用不同的频域/码域资源以保持正交。As shown in Figure 4, the network devices are TRP1 and TRP2, and the terminal devices are UE1 and UE2. TRP1 and TRP2 serve UE1 together and send data to UE1. Therefore, TRP1 and TRP2 need to obtain the channels from UE1 to TRP1 and TRP2 in advance. By configuring an SRS resource (SRS resource 1), UE1 sends an SRS signal on SRS resource 1, and TRP1 and TRP2 both receive the SRS signal from UE1 on this resource, thereby obtaining their respective channels. TRP1 and TRP2 also serve UE2 together. Similar to serving UE1, TRP1 and TRP2 need to obtain the channels from UE2 to TRP1 and TRP2 in advance. By configuring an SRS resource (SRS resource 2), UE2 sends an SRS signal on SRS resource 2, and TRP1 and TRP2 both receive the SRS signal from UE2 on this resource, thereby obtaining their respective channels. It can be seen that for a UE, only one SRS resource is needed to enable multiple TRPs to simultaneously acquire the channel of the UE. In order to serve UE1 and UE2 at the same time, SRS1 and SRS2 are usually configured with the same base sequence and occupy different frequency domain/code domain resources to maintain orthogonality.
通常,由于UE与不同TPR的距离不同,UE发送的SRS信号到不同TRP的时延也不同,即τ1,1≠τ1,2,τ2,1≠τ2,2,其中τi,j表示UEi到TRPj的时延。Generally, due to the different distances between the UE and different TRPs, the delays of the SRS signal sent by the UE to different TRPs are also different, that is, τ 1,1 ≠τ 1,2 , τ 2,1 ≠τ 2,2 , where τ i,j represents the delay from UEi to TRPj.
LTE和NR的SRS采用的序列是基序列(base sequence)的循环移位:
Sequences used by LTE and NR SRS is the base sequence The circular shift of:
其中,α为循环移位值,为实数;δ=log2(KTC),为整数;u,v为SRS基序列组中某个基序列的索引,为整数;j为虚数单位;MZC为SRS序列的长度,为正整数;n为SRS序列中元素的索引,为整数,序列元素(即SRS序列中的元素)按照索引由小到大的顺序依次映射在SRS资源对应的子载波索引由小到大的各个子载波上。 Among them, α is the cyclic shift value, which is a real number; δ = log 2 (K TC ), which is an integer; u, v is the index of a base sequence in the SRS base sequence group, which is an integer; j is an imaginary unit; M ZC is the length of the SRS sequence, which is a positive integer; n is the index of the element in the SRS sequence, which is an integer. The sequence elements (i.e., the elements in the SRS sequence) are mapped in ascending order of index on each subcarrier corresponding to the SRS resource with an index from small to large.
上述基序列可以是Zadoff-Chu(ZC)序列生成的序列,例如是ZC序列本身,或者是ZC序列通过循环移位扩充或者截取生成的序列。例如,长度为N的ZC序列为zq(n),n=0,1,…,N-1,则由该ZC序列生成的长度为M的序列可以表示为:zq(m mod N),m=0,1,…,M-1。其中,长度为N的ZC序列可以表示为如下形式:
The above base sequence It can be a sequence generated by a Zadoff-Chu (ZC) sequence, such as the ZC sequence itself, or a sequence generated by expanding or truncating the ZC sequence by cyclic shift. For example, a ZC sequence of length N is z q (n), n = 0, 1, ..., N-1, then a sequence of length M generated by the ZC sequence can be expressed as: z q (m mod N), m = 0, 1, ..., M-1. Among them, a ZC sequence of length N can be expressed as follows:
其中,N为正整数,q为ZC序列的根指标,且为与N互质且小于N的正整数。Wherein, N is a positive integer, q is the root index of the ZC sequence, and is a positive integer that is coprime with N and less than N.
SRS端口pi对应的循环移位αi由下式定义:
The cyclic shift α i corresponding to the SRS port p i is defined as follows:
其中,表示端口数量(即SRS资源包括的SRS端口的数量),为最大循环移位数量,根据KTC取值分别定义,可以参阅表1。in, Indicates the number of ports (i.e. the number of SRS ports included in the SRS resource), is the maximum number of cyclic shifts, which are defined according to the value of K TC . Please refer to Table 1.
的含义可以理解为将时延域等分成份,也可以理解为将相位值2π等分成份,每个循环移位值对应每份的起始点。为循环移位参考索引,由网络设备通过高层参数transmissionComb半静态配置。 The meaning can be understood as dividing the delay domain into equal parts It can also be understood as dividing the phase value 2π into equal parts. Each cyclic shift value corresponds to the starting point of each portion. It is a cyclic shift reference index, which is semi-statically configured by the network device through the high-level parameter transmissionComb.
采用不同的循环移位可以使信号占据时延域的不同部分,因此在理想情况下,不同CS取值的两路信号可以被接收端区分。Using different cyclic shifts can make the signal occupy different parts of the delay domain. Therefore, in an ideal case, two signals with different CS values can be distinguished by the receiving end.
图5示出了一种SRS在时延域上的分布示意图。FIG5 shows a schematic diagram of SRS distribution in the delay domain.
如图5中的(a)所示,SRS1的端口数最大循环移位数量循环移位值起始位置在该配置下,SRS1的4个端口分别占据着循环移位值0、2、4、6,框内的一簇竖线表示的是时延域信道,此时相邻的两个端口对应的循环移位值相差2,4个端口均匀分布在整个时延域上,相邻端口对应的循环移位值的间隔都相同,这样即使某些端口的时延扩展较大,也不会出现端口间的相互干扰。As shown in (a) of Figure 5, the number of ports of SRS1 Maximum number of cyclic shifts The starting position of the circular shift value In this configuration, the four ports of SRS1 occupy cyclic shift values 0, 2, 4, and 6 respectively. The cluster of vertical lines in the box represents the delay domain channel. At this time, the cyclic shift values corresponding to two adjacent ports differ by 2. The four ports are evenly distributed in the entire delay domain, and the intervals between the cyclic shift values corresponding to adjacent ports are the same. In this way, even if the delay spread of some ports is large, there will be no mutual interference between the ports.
但是图5中的(a)的一些资源没有得到充分利用,例如,循环移位值1、3、5、7都没有被占用,实际中,网络设备通常会将这些剩余的资源再分配给其他的SRS,举例来说,如图5中的(b)所示,此处可以再配置SRS2,其端口数最大循环移位数量循环移位值起始位置此时,SRS资源2的4个端口分别占据着循环移位值1、3、5、7,相邻两个端口对应的循环移位值相差为2。However, some resources in (a) of FIG5 are not fully utilized. For example, cyclic shift values 1, 3, 5, and 7 are not occupied. In practice, network devices usually reallocate these remaining resources to other SRSs. For example, as shown in (b) of FIG5, SRS2 can be configured here, and its port number is Maximum number of cyclic shifts The starting position of the circular shift value At this time, the four ports of SRS resource 2 occupy cyclic shift values 1, 3, 5, and 7 respectively, and the cyclic shift values corresponding to two adjacent ports differ by 2.
总体来看,SRS1和SRS2各自保证自己的端口均匀分布在整个时延域上,而在整体上,SRS1和SRS2的各端口在整个时延域上交错排布。In general, SRS1 and SRS2 each ensure that their ports are evenly distributed in the entire delay domain, and in general, the ports of SRS1 and SRS2 are staggered in the entire delay domain.
进一步地,针对邻区干扰场景,目前将端口对应的循环移位值进行随机化。具体的,在不同的SRS传输时刻,SRS的端口对应的循环移位值在集合中随机选取。Furthermore, for the neighboring cell interference scenario, the cyclic shift value corresponding to the port is currently randomized. Specifically, at different SRS transmission times, the cyclic shift value corresponding to the SRS port is in the set Randomly selected from .
举例来说,假设SRS1包含4个端口,则在第一个SRS传输时间(时间1),该SRS资源的4个端口对应的循环移位值分别对应0、3、6、9,如图6中的(a)所示,而在第二个SRS传输时间(时间2),该SRS资源的4个端口对应的循环移位值分别对应1、4、7、10,如图6中的(b)所示。这样做的好处是,当邻区(小区2)干扰信号的循环移位不变时,如图6中的(c)所示,本小区(小区1)SRS的端口对应的循环移位值不断变换可以实现干扰随机化的效果。For example, suppose SRS1 contains 4 ports. At the first SRS transmission time (time 1), the cyclic shift values corresponding to the 4 ports of the SRS resource correspond to 0, 3, 6, and 9, respectively, as shown in (a) of Figure 6, and at the second SRS transmission time (time 2), the cyclic shift values corresponding to the 4 ports of the SRS resource correspond to 1, 4, 7, and 10, respectively, as shown in (b) of Figure 6. The advantage of this is that when the cyclic shift of the interference signal of the neighboring cell (cell 2) remains unchanged, as shown in (c) of Figure 6, the cyclic shift value corresponding to the port of the SRS of the current cell (cell 1) is constantly changed to achieve the effect of interference randomization.
以图4中两UE两TRP的场景为例,假设并且SRS1和SRS2占用相同的梳齿且都有4个端口,那么一种常见的分配方式是SRS1的4个端口分别对应循环移位值0、3、6、9,SRS2的4个端口分别对应循环移位值1、4、7、10,如图7中的(a)所示,图中方框内的竖线表示该端口在时延域上的信道冲击响应,方框指示了各端口的信道冲激响应在时延域上所占的区域。Take the scenario of two UEs and two TRPs in Figure 4 as an example. And SRS1 and SRS2 occupy the same comb teeth and both have 4 ports, then a common allocation method is that the 4 ports of SRS1 correspond to cyclic shift values 0, 3, 6, and 9 respectively, and the 4 ports of SRS2 correspond to cyclic shift values 1, 4, 7, and 10 respectively, as shown in (a) in Figure 7. The vertical line in the box in the figure represents the channel impulse response of the port in the delay domain, and the box indicates the area occupied by the channel impulse response of each port in the delay domain.
由于UE的SRS信号到不同TRP存在时延差,受到时延差影响,原本正交的资源间会出现相互干扰,降低信道估计性能。Since there is a delay difference between the UE's SRS signal and different TRPs, due to the delay difference, originally orthogonal resources will interfere with each other, reducing the channel estimation performance.
例如,假设UE1与TRP1对齐,即UE1的信号到TRP1的时延为0,而UE1到TRP2存在时延。另外假设UE2与TRP2对齐,即UE2的信号到TRP2的时延为0,而UE2到TRP1存在时延。则TRP1收到时延域信号如图7中的(b)所示,由于UE2到TRP1存在时延,因此在时延域上,UE2的信道会向右循 环偏移。For example, assume that UE1 is aligned with TRP1, that is, the delay from UE1 to TRP1 is 0, while there is a delay from UE1 to TRP2. Also assume that UE2 is aligned with TRP2, that is, the delay from UE2 to TRP2 is 0, while there is a delay from UE2 to TRP1. Then the delay domain signal received by TRP1 is as shown in (b) of Figure 7. Since there is a delay from UE2 to TRP1, in the delay domain, UE2's channel will rotate to the right. Ring offset.
同理,TRP2收到的时延域信号如图7中的(c)所示,由于UE1到TRP2存在时延,因此在时延域上,UE1的信道会向右循环偏移并与UE2的信道相互混叠,造成干扰。Similarly, the delay domain signal received by TRP2 is shown in (c) of FIG7 . Since there is a delay from UE1 to TRP2, in the delay domain, the channel of UE1 will be cyclically shifted to the right and overlap with the channel of UE2, causing interference.
在目前的随机化方案中,SRS的端口对应的循环移位值是在所有可用循环移位值集合中进行随机选取的,这样随机化会使TRP1收到的SRS信号在一些情况下相互干扰,比如当SRS1的端口对应的循环移位值为0、3、6、9,SRS2的端口对应的循环移位值也为0、3、6、9时,此时TRP1收到的信号会发生碰撞,如图8所示。In the current randomization scheme, the cyclic shift value corresponding to the SRS port is in the set of all available cyclic shift values. Such randomization may cause the SRS signals received by TRP1 to interfere with each other in some cases. For example, when the cyclic shift values corresponding to the ports of SRS1 are 0, 3, 6, 9, and the cyclic shift values corresponding to the ports of SRS2 are also 0, 3, 6, 9, the signals received by TRP1 may collide, as shown in FIG8 .
有鉴于此,为了保证SRS序列间正交,本申请提供一种通信方法,以期实现SRS序列间的正交。In view of this, in order to ensure orthogonality between SRS sequences, the present application provides a communication method to achieve orthogonality between SRS sequences.
下文示出的实施例并未对本申请实施例提供的方法的执行主体的具体结构特别限定,只要能够通过运行记录有本申请实施例的提供的方法的代码的程序,以根据本申请实施例提供的方法进行通信即可,例如,本申请实施例提供的方法的执行主体可以是终端设备或接入网设备,或者,是终端设备或接入设备中能够调用程序并执行程序的功能模块。The embodiments shown below do not particularly limit the specific structure of the execution subject of the method provided in the embodiments of the present application. As long as it is possible to communicate according to the method provided in the embodiments of the present application by running a program that records the code of the method provided in the embodiments of the present application, for example, the execution subject of the method provided in the embodiments of the present application may be a terminal device or an access network device, or a functional module in the terminal device or the access device that can call and execute the program.
为了便于理解本申请实施例,做出以下几点说明。In order to facilitate understanding of the embodiments of the present application, the following explanations are made.
第一,为方便理解和说明,首先对本申请中涉及到的主要参数分别说明如下:First, for ease of understanding and explanation, the main parameters involved in this application are described as follows:
pi:天线端口i的序号。p i : the serial number of antenna port i.
αi:循环移位值。α i : cyclic shift value.
循环移位参考索引。 Rotate reference index.
初始循环移位值。 Initial circular shift value.
一个SRS配置的天线端口数,由高层参数nrofSRS-Ports配置,否则,天线端口数为1。 The number of antenna ports for an SRS configuration is configured by the higher-level parameter nrofSRS-Ports. Otherwise, the number of antenna ports is 1.
最大循环移位数。目前协议中定义的最大循环移位数,与KTC相对应。 Maximum cyclic shift number. The maximum cyclic shift number defined in the current protocol corresponds to K TC .
循环移位值偏置,用于确定循环移位。 The cyclic shift value offset is used to determine the cyclic shift.
L:随机化区间长度,表示循环移位值偏置的取值范围所包含的子区间的长度,子区间的长度即子区间左右端点的差值的绝对值。下文中的L、M、L1的定义都可以参考此处说明。L: randomization interval length, which indicates the length of the sub-interval contained in the value range of the cyclic shift value bias. The length of the sub-interval is the absolute value of the difference between the left and right endpoints of the sub-interval. The definitions of L, M, and L1 in the following text can refer to the description here.
K:循环移位偏置取值粒度,K表示单位长度内循环移位值偏置取值的数目。举例说明,区间[0,2]的长度为两个单位长度,当K=1时,表示每个单位长度内只有一个循环移位值偏置取值,所以在[0,2]内循环移位值偏置共有两个取值,比如0和1。当K=2时,表明在[0,2]内循环移位值偏置共有4个取值,比如0、0.5、1、1.5四个取值。K: Circular shift bias value granularity, K represents the number of cyclic shift bias values within a unit length. For example, the length of the interval [0,2] is two unit lengths. When K=1, it means that there is only one cyclic shift bias value within each unit length, so there are two cyclic shift bias values in [0,2], such as 0 and 1. When K=2, it means that there are 4 cyclic shift bias values in [0,2], such as 0, 0.5, 1, and 1.5.
b:随机化方向,用于确定循环移位值偏置的正负。b: Randomization direction, used to determine the positive or negative bias of the cyclic shift value.
δ:第一数值,依照SRS发送时刻以及伪随机序列确定。δ: a first value, determined according to the SRS sending time and the pseudo-random sequence.
γ:第二数值,依照SRS发送时刻以及伪随机序列确定。γ: a second value, determined according to the SRS sending time and the pseudo-random sequence.
Δ:区间间隔,表示循环移位取值范围中两个子区间之间的最小间隔,子区间之间的间隔即子区间左端点数值差的绝对值。Δ: interval interval, which indicates the minimum interval between two sub-intervals in the cyclic shift value range. The interval between sub-intervals is the absolute value of the difference between the left endpoints of the sub-intervals.
第二,在本申请中,“用于指示”可以理解为“使能”,“使能”可以包括直接使能和间接使能。当描述某一信息用于使能A时,可以包括该信息直接使能A或间接使能A,而并不代表该信息中一定携带有A。Second, in this application, "used to indicate" can be understood as "enable", and "enable" can include direct enablement and indirect enablement. When describing that a certain information is used to enable A, it can include that the information directly enables A or indirectly enables A, but it does not mean that the information must carry A.
将信息所使能的信息称为待使能信息,则具体实现过程中,对待使能信息进行使能的方式有很多种,例如但不限于,可以直接使能待使能信息,如待使能信息本身或者该待使能信息的索引等。也可以通过使能其他信息来间接使能待使能信息,其中该其他信息与待使能信息之间存在关联关系。还可以仅仅使能待使能信息的一部分,而待使能信息的其他部分则是已知的或者提前约定的。例如,还可以借助预先约定(例如协议规定)的各个信息的排列顺序来实现对特定信息的使能,从而在一定程度上降低使能开销。同时,还可以识别各个信息的通用部分并统一使能,以降低单独使能同样的信息而带来的使能开销。The information enabled by the information is called information to be enabled. In the specific implementation process, there are many ways to enable the information to be enabled, such as but not limited to, the information to be enabled can be directly enabled, such as the information to be enabled itself or the index of the information to be enabled. The information to be enabled can also be indirectly enabled by enabling other information, wherein there is an association relationship between the other information and the information to be enabled. It is also possible to enable only a part of the information to be enabled, while the other parts of the information to be enabled are known or agreed in advance. For example, the enabling of specific information can also be achieved by means of the arrangement order of each piece of information agreed in advance (such as specified by the protocol), thereby reducing the enabling overhead to a certain extent. At the same time, the common parts of each piece of information can also be identified and enabled uniformly to reduce the enabling overhead caused by enabling the same information separately.
第三,在本申请中示出的第一、第二以及各种数字编号(例如,“#1”、“#2”等)仅为描述方便,用于区分的对象,并不用来限制本申请实施例的范围。例如,区分不同的SRS等。而不是用于描述特定的顺序或先后次序。应该理解这样描述的对象在适当情况下可以互换,以便能够描述本申请的实施例以外的方案。Third, the first, second and various numerical numbers (e.g., "#1", "#2", etc.) shown in the present application are only for convenience of description and are used to distinguish objects, and are not used to limit the scope of the embodiments of the present application. For example, to distinguish different SRSs, etc., rather than to describe a specific order or sequence. It should be understood that the objects described in this way can be interchangeable where appropriate so as to be able to describe solutions other than the embodiments of the present application.
第四,在本申请中,“预设”可包括预先定义,例如,协议定义。其中,“预先定义”可以通过在设备(例如,包括用户设备或核心网设备)中预先保存相应的代码、表格或其他可用于指示相关信息的方式来实现,本申请对于其具体的实现方式不做限定。 Fourth, in this application, "pre-set" may include pre-definition, for example, protocol definition. Among them, "pre-definition" can be implemented by pre-saving corresponding codes, tables or other methods that can be used to indicate relevant information in a device (for example, including user equipment or core network equipment), and this application does not limit its specific implementation method.
第五,本申请实施例中涉及的“保存”,可以是指的保存在一个或者多个存储器中。所述一个或者多个存储器,可以是单独的设置,也可以是集成在编码器或者译码器,处理器、或通信装置中。所述一个或者多个存储器,也可以是一部分单独设置,一部分集成在译码器、处理器、或通信装置中。存储器的类型可以是任意形式的存储介质,本申请并不对此限定。Fifth, the "storage" involved in the embodiments of the present application may refer to storage in one or more memories. The one or more memories may be separately set or integrated in an encoder or decoder, a processor, or a communication device. The one or more memories may also be partially separately set and partially integrated in a decoder, a processor, or a communication device. The type of memory may be any form of storage medium, which is not limited by the present application.
第六,本申请实施例中涉及的“协议”可以是指通信领域的标准协议,例如可以包括5G协议、新空口(new radio,NR)协议以及应用于未来的通信系统中的相关协议,本申请对此不做限定。Sixth, the "protocol" involved in the embodiments of the present application may refer to a standard protocol in the communication field, for example, it may include a 5G protocol, a new radio (NR) protocol, and related protocols used in future communication systems, and the present application does not limit this.
以下,不失一般性,以网络设备和终端设备之间的交互为例详细说明本申请实施例提供的通信方法。下文中的网络设备可以是多网络设备多终端设备联合传输场景中的多个网络设备中的一个,下文中的终端设备可以是多网络设备多终端设备联合传输场景中多个终端设备中的一个。In the following, without loss of generality, the communication method provided by the embodiment of the present application is described in detail by taking the interaction between a network device and a terminal device as an example. The network device mentioned below may be one of the multiple network devices in a multi-network device multi-terminal device joint transmission scenario, and the terminal device mentioned below may be one of the multiple terminal devices in a multi-network device multi-terminal device joint transmission scenario.
图9示出了一种通信方法的示意图。该方法能够降低不同SRS之间的干扰,提升获取信道状态的准确性。Figure 9 shows a schematic diagram of a communication method. This method can reduce interference between different SRSs and improve the accuracy of acquiring channel status.
该方法可以包括下述步骤:The method may include the following steps:
S910,网络设备确定SRS资源。S910: The network device determines SRS resources.
该SRS资源对应N个端口,这N个端口中的每个端口对应一个循环移位CS。可选地,这N个端口分别对应的CS可以相同,也可以不同。其中,所谓相同可以理解为N个端口分别对应的CS完全相同。所谓不同可以理解为N个端口中至少有两个端口分别对应的CS不同,也可以是N个端口各自对应的CS均不同。The SRS resource corresponds to N ports, and each of the N ports corresponds to a cyclic shift CS. Optionally, the CSs corresponding to the N ports may be the same or different. The so-called same may be understood as the CSs corresponding to the N ports are exactly the same. The so-called different may be understood as the CSs corresponding to at least two of the N ports are different, or the CSs corresponding to the N ports are different.
SRS资源的定义可以参考前文说明,这里不赘述。The definition of SRS resources can be found in the previous description and will not be repeated here.
S920,网络设备向终端设备发送SRS资源的配置信息,对应地,终端设备接收该SRS资源的配置信息。S920, the network device sends the configuration information of the SRS resource to the terminal device, and correspondingly, the terminal device receives the configuration information of the SRS resource.
SRS资源的配置信息用于配置SRS资源。The configuration information of the SRS resource is used to configure the SRS resource.
一种可能的方式,SRS资源的配置信息通过指示循环移位,以使终端设备确定SRS资源。In one possible manner, the configuration information of the SRS resource indicates a cyclic shift so that the terminal device can determine the SRS resource.
例如,SRS资源的配置信息可以指示上述N个端口分别对应的循环移位,以使终端设备根据N个端口分别对应的循环移位确定N个端口分别对应的SRS资源。For example, the configuration information of the SRS resources may indicate the cyclic shifts corresponding to the N ports respectively, so that the terminal device determines the SRS resources corresponding to the N ports respectively according to the cyclic shifts corresponding to the N ports respectively.
又例如,SRS资源的配置信息可以指示用于确定循环移位的相关参数,以使终端设备根据这些参数确定N个端口分别对应的循环移位,进一步确定N个端口分别对应的SRS资源。For another example, the configuration information of the SRS resource may indicate relevant parameters for determining the cyclic shift, so that the terminal device determines the cyclic shifts corresponding to the N ports respectively according to these parameters, and further determines the SRS resources corresponding to the N ports respectively.
又一种可能的方式,SRS资源的配置信息指示上述N个端口对应的SRS资源。In another possible manner, the configuration information of the SRS resource indicates the SRS resources corresponding to the N ports.
S930,终端设备根据循环移位参考索引、第一端口的索引和第一端口对应的循环移位值偏置确定第一端口对应的循环移位。S930, the terminal device determines the cyclic shift corresponding to the first port according to the cyclic shift reference index, the index of the first port and the cyclic shift value offset corresponding to the first port.
一种可能的实现,SRS资源的配置信息指示用于确定循环移位的相关参数。In a possible implementation, the configuration information of the SRS resource indicates relevant parameters for determining the cyclic shift.
示例地,以第一端口为例,第一端口是上述N个端口中的一个。该相关参数可以是:第一端口对应的循环移位参考索引、第一端口的索引和第一端口对应的循环移位值偏置。For example, taking the first port as an example, the first port is one of the above N ports. The relevant parameters may be: a cyclic shift reference index corresponding to the first port, an index of the first port, and a cyclic shift value offset corresponding to the first port.
也就是说,第一端口对应的循环移位与第一端口对应的循环移位参考索引、第一端口的索引和第一端口对应的循环移位值偏置关联。That is, the cyclic shift corresponding to the first port is associated with the cyclic shift reference index corresponding to the first port, the index of the first port, and the cyclic shift value offset corresponding to the first port.
举个例子,终端设备根据第一端口的索引以及第一端口对应的循环移位参考索引可以确定第一端口对应的初始循环移位值,再根据第一端口对应的初始循环移位值和第一端口对应的循环移位值偏置确定第一端口对应的循环移位。For example, the terminal device can determine the initial cyclic shift value corresponding to the first port based on the index of the first port and the cyclic shift reference index corresponding to the first port, and then determine the cyclic shift corresponding to the first port based on the initial cyclic shift value corresponding to the first port and the cyclic shift value offset corresponding to the first port.
另一个例子是,终端设备根据第一端口的索引和第一端口对应的循环移位参考索引以及第一端口对应的循环移位值偏置直接确定第一端口对应的循环移位Another example is that the terminal device directly determines the cyclic shift corresponding to the first port according to the index of the first port, the cyclic shift reference index corresponding to the first port, and the cyclic shift value offset corresponding to the first port.
其中,第一端口对应的循环移位值偏置是根据所述SRS的发送时刻和/或所述第一端口的梳齿偏置值,和所述子区间长度确定的。其中,循环移位值偏置与子区间长度的定义可以参考前述说明,不再赘述。The cyclic shift value offset corresponding to the first port is determined according to the transmission time of the SRS and/or the comb offset value of the first port, and the sub-interval length. The definitions of the cyclic shift value offset and the sub-interval length can refer to the above description and will not be repeated.
第一端口对应的循环移位偏置属于第一取值范围,第一取值范围为一个子区间或多个不重叠的子区间的并集。The cyclic shift offset corresponding to the first port belongs to a first value range, and the first value range is a sub-interval or a union of multiple non-overlapping sub-intervals.
示例地,第一取值范围中仅包括一个子区间,该子区间长度为2,则第一端口对应的循环移位偏置在这个长度为2的子区间中选择。For example, the first value range includes only one sub-interval, the length of which is 2, and the cyclic shift offset corresponding to the first port is selected from the sub-interval with a length of 2.
另一个示例,第一取值范围中包括多个子区间,该多个子区间连续。比如第一取值范围包括3个子区间,该3个子区间分别为子区间1、子区间2和子区间3,子区间1的右端点与子区间2的左端点重合,子区间2的右端点与子区间3的左端点重合。可选地,该3个子区间也可以视为一个包含子区间1、子区 间2和子区间3的区间。In another example, the first value range includes multiple sub-intervals, and the multiple sub-intervals are continuous. For example, the first value range includes 3 sub-intervals, and the 3 sub-intervals are sub-interval 1, sub-interval 2, and sub-interval 3. The right endpoint of sub-interval 1 coincides with the left endpoint of sub-interval 2, and the right endpoint of sub-interval 2 coincides with the left endpoint of sub-interval 3. Optionally, the 3 sub-intervals can also be regarded as a sub-interval 1, sub-interval 2, and sub-interval 3. The interval of interval 2 and subinterval 3.
又一个示例,第一取值范围中包括多个子区间,该多个子区间连续。比如第一取值范围包括3个子区间,该3个子区间分别为子区间1、子区间2和子区间3,子区间1的右端点与子区间2的左端点不重合,子区间2的右端点与子区间3的左端点不重合。即子区间1与子区间2之间存在间隔,子区间2与子区间3之间存在间隔。换句话说,第一取值范围包括多个子区间,该多个子区间两两之间存在间隔,或者说多个子区间之间不连续。In another example, the first value range includes multiple sub-intervals, and the multiple sub-intervals are continuous. For example, the first value range includes 3 sub-intervals, and the 3 sub-intervals are sub-interval 1, sub-interval 2, and sub-interval 3. The right endpoint of sub-interval 1 does not overlap with the left endpoint of sub-interval 2, and the right endpoint of sub-interval 2 does not overlap with the left endpoint of sub-interval 3. That is, there is a gap between sub-interval 1 and sub-interval 2, and there is a gap between sub-interval 2 and sub-interval 3. In other words, the first value range includes multiple sub-intervals, and there are gaps between the multiple sub-intervals, or the multiple sub-intervals are not continuous.
一种可能的实现,第一端口对应的循环移位满足下述关系:
In a possible implementation, the cyclic shift corresponding to the first port satisfies the following relationship:
或者,
or,
其中表示下取整运算。in Indicates floor operation.
下面根据第一取值范围中包含子区间的不同情况对循环移位值偏置分别说明。Next, the cyclic shift value is biased according to different situations in which the first value range contains subintervals. Explain separately.
情况1:第一取值范围包括的子区间数量为1。Case 1: The number of sub-intervals included in the first value range is 1.
这种情况下又分为两种可能:There are two possibilities in this case:
可能1:SRS的资源配置信息指示第一区间长度L,L可以是第一取值范围包括的子区间的长度,也就是第一取值范围包括的这1个子区间的长度。Possibility 1: the resource configuration information of the SRS indicates the first interval length L, where L may be the length of the sub-interval included in the first value range, that is, the length of the sub-interval included in the first value range.
第一端口对应的循环移位值偏置满足下述关系:The cyclic shift value offset corresponding to the first port satisfies the following relationship:
或者,
or,
当SRS资源的配置信息还指示第一端口对应的循环移位偏置取值粒度K时,When the configuration information of the SRS resource further indicates the granularity K of the cyclic shift bias value corresponding to the first port,
或者,
or,
可选的,第一端口对应的循环移位值偏置满足下述关系:Optionally, the cyclic shift value offset corresponding to the first port satisfies the following relationship:
或者, or,
或者, or,
或者,
or,
可选的,L的取值范围为 Optional, the value range of L is
δ为第一数值,第一数值是根据SRS的发送时刻以及伪随机序列确定。其中,伪随机序列可以参考前文说明,不再赘述。δ is a first value, and the first value is determined according to the SRS transmission time and the pseudo-random sequence. The pseudo-random sequence can refer to the above description and will not be described in detail.
可选地,区间长度L取值范围为 Optionally, the interval length L ranges from
例如或者,
For example or,
或者 or
其中c(i)是伪随机序列,按或进行初始化,表示小区的标识(ID), 表示SRS的标识(ID)。cinit可以是根据高层参数确定的。Where c(i) is a pseudo-random sequence, or Initialize, Indicates the ID of the cell, Indicates the ID of the SRS. c init may be determined according to a high-level parameter.
T是某时间单元,其取值可以是 T is a time unit, which can be
或者, or,
或者, or,
或者 or
或者 or
或者 or
或者 or
或者 or
或者 or
或者, or,
或者, or,
或者 or
或者 or
或者 or
或者 or
其中Q为一正整数,Where Q is a positive integer,
表示在子载波间隔配置为μ时,时间单元所在帧中对应的时隙号(可以理解的是,对于μ的不同取值,帧中包含的时隙数目不同)。 It indicates the time slot number corresponding to the frame where the time unit is located when the subcarrier spacing is configured as μ (it can be understood that for different values of μ, the number of time slots included in the frame is different).
表示每个时隙中的符号数。 Indicates the number of symbols in each time slot.
l0表示第一时间单元对应的一个slot内的起始OFDM符号位置。l 0 represents the starting OFDM symbol position in a slot corresponding to the first time unit.
l′表示第一时间单元对应的相对于l0的OFDM符号位置, l′ represents the OFDM symbol position corresponding to the first time unit relative to l 0 ,
R是重复传输次数,或者是重复因子,即发送相同信号的时域次数。R is the number of repeated transmissions, or the repetition factor, which is the number of times in the time domain the same signal is sent.
下文中涉及到δ的计算,均可以参考此处说明。The calculation of δ mentioned below can refer to the description here.
进一步地,SRS资源的配置信息还可以指示第一方向b,该第一方向用于确定第一端口对应的循环移位值偏置的正负。或者说,该第一方向用于确定最终的循环移位比初始循环移位值更大还是更小。Furthermore, the configuration information of the SRS resource may also indicate a first direction b, which is used to determine the positive or negative sign of the cyclic shift value offset corresponding to the first port. In other words, the first direction is used to determine whether the final cyclic shift is larger or smaller than the initial cyclic shift value.
第一端口对应的循环移位值偏置满足下述关系:
The cyclic shift value offset corresponding to the first port satisfies the following relationship:
b的取值可以是1,也可以是0。The value of b can be 1 or 0.
当SRS资源的配置信息还指示第一端口对应的循环移位偏置取值粒度K时,
When the configuration information of the SRS resource further indicates the granularity K of the cyclic shift bias value corresponding to the first port,
可选地,区间长度L取值范围为 Optionally, the interval length L ranges from
一种可能的实现,第一端口对应的循环移位值偏置满足下述关系:In a possible implementation, the cyclic shift value offset corresponding to the first port satisfies the following relationship:
或者,
or,
可选地,区间长度L取值范围为 Optionally, the interval length L ranges from
可能2:SRS的资源配置信息指示区间长度L1(第二区间长度)和区间长度L2(第三区间长度)。区间长度L1和区间长度L2之和为第一取值范围的子区间的长度。Possibility 2: The resource configuration information of the SRS indicates the interval length L1 (second interval length) and the interval length L2 (third interval length). The sum of the interval length L1 and the interval length L2 is the length of the sub-interval of the first value range.
换句话说,第一取值范围所包括的那一个子区间的长度通过两个长度参数来表示。In other words, the length of the subinterval included in the first value range is represented by two length parameters.
第一端口对应的循环移位值偏置满足下述关系:
The cyclic shift value offset corresponding to the first port satisfies the following relationship:
其中,δ为第一数值,第一数值是根据SRS的发送时刻以及伪随机序列确定的,γ为第二数值,第二数值是根据SRS的发送时刻以及伪随机序列确定的。伪随机序列可以参考前文说明,不再赘述。Wherein, δ is a first value determined according to the SRS transmission time and the pseudo-random sequence, γ is a second value determined according to the SRS transmission time and the pseudo-random sequence. The pseudo-random sequence can refer to the above description and will not be repeated here.
当SRS资源的配置信息还指示第一端口对应的循环移位偏置取值粒度K时,
When the configuration information of the SRS resource further indicates the granularity K of the cyclic shift bias value corresponding to the first port,
可选地,区间长度L1和L2取值范围均为 Optionally, the interval lengths L1 and L2 are in the range
γ为第二数值,比如可以是γ=c(T),T是时间单元取值,具体可以参考可能1中的相关说明。γ is a second value, for example, γ=c(T), T is a time unit value, and the details can refer to the relevant description in Possible 1.
一种可能的实现方式,A possible implementation is
或者,
or,
可选的,L1的取值范围为 Optional, L1 value range is
可选的,L2的取值范围为 Optional, L2 value range is
情况2:第一取值范围包括的子区间数量大于1。Case 2: The number of sub-intervals included in the first value range is greater than 1.
即,第一取值范围包括两个及两个以上的子区间。That is, the first value range includes two or more sub-intervals.
SRS资源的配置信息指示第一子区间的长度和区间间隔,区间间隔表示第一取值范围内相邻两个子区间包含的值的最小值的差值的绝对值,所述第一子区间为所述两个或两个以上所述子区间中的一个。The configuration information of the SRS resource indicates the length and interval of the first sub-interval, the interval interval represents the absolute value of the difference between the minimum values of the values contained in two adjacent sub-intervals within the first value range, and the first sub-interval is one of the two or more sub-intervals.
应理解,这里的相邻指的是在区间间隔左右的两个子区间,并非是端点存在重合的两个子区间。It should be understood that the term "adjacent" here refers to two sub-intervals on the left and right sides of the interval, rather than two sub-intervals whose endpoints overlap.
一种可能的实现,第一端口对应的循环移位值偏置满足下述关系:
In a possible implementation, the cyclic shift value offset corresponding to the first port satisfies the following relationship:
其中,为第一端口对应的循环移位值偏置,δ为第一数值,第一数值是根据所述SRS的发送时刻以及伪随机序列确定的,L3为第一子区间的长度,Δ为区间间隔。in, is the cyclic shift value offset corresponding to the first port, δ is a first value, the first value is determined according to the sending time of the SRS and the pseudo-random sequence, L3 is the length of the first sub-interval, and Δ is the interval.
当SRS资源的配置信息还指示第一端口对应的循环移位偏置取值粒度K时,
When the configuration information of the SRS resource further indicates the granularity K of the cyclic shift bias value corresponding to the first port,
可选地,区间长度L3取值范围为 Optionally, the interval length L3 ranges from
一种可能的实现方式,A possible implementation is
第一端口对应的循环移位值偏置满足下述关系:The cyclic shift value offset corresponding to the first port satisfies the following relationship:
或者,
or,
可选的,L3的取值范围为 Optional, the value range of L3 is
进一步地,SRS资源的配置信息还可以指示第一方向b。具体的,关于第一方向b可以参考前文说明,不再赘述。Furthermore, the configuration information of the SRS resource may also indicate a first direction b. Specifically, the first direction b may be referred to the above description and will not be described in detail.
第一端口对应的循环移位值偏置满足下述关系:
The cyclic shift value offset corresponding to the first port satisfies the following relationship:
可选地,区间长度L3取值范围为 Optionally, the interval length L3 ranges from
或者,或者,
or, or,
可选的,L3的取值范围为 Optional, the value range of L3 is
进一步地,SRS资源的配置信息还指示所述第一端口对应的循环移位偏置取值粒度K。Furthermore, the configuration information of the SRS resource also indicates a granularity K of a cyclic shift bias value corresponding to the first port.
第一端口对应的循环移位满足下述关系:
The cyclic shift corresponding to the first port satisfies the following relationship:
或者,
or,
或者,
or,
一种可能的实现,第一端口对应的循环移位值偏置满足下述关系:In a possible implementation, the cyclic shift value offset corresponding to the first port satisfies the following relationship:
或者, or,
可选地,K的取值范围为{1,2,4}。Optionally, the value range of K is {1, 2, 4}.
可选地,L的取值范围为 Optionally, the value range of L is
一种可能的实现,第一端口对应的循环移位值偏置满足下述关系:In a possible implementation, the cyclic shift value offset corresponding to the first port satisfies the following relationship:
或者, or,
或者, or,
或者,
or,
其中,所述为所述第一端口对应的初始循环移位值,所述为最大循环移位值,所述为所述第一端口对应的循环移位参考索引,所述为N的取值,所述pi为所述第一端口的索引,所述为所述第一端口对应的循环移位值偏置。Among them, the is the initial cyclic shift value corresponding to the first port, is the maximum cyclic shift value, is the cyclic shift reference index corresponding to the first port, is the value of N, the pi is the index of the first port, the A cyclic shift value offset corresponding to the first port.
函数g(x,y)=xmody或者 Function g(x,y)=xmody or
可选的,第一端口对应的初始循环移位值具体的确定公式是根据预设条件确定的。预设条件与SRS资源中的端口数,以及有关。Optionally, the specific formula for determining the initial cyclic shift value corresponding to the first port is determined according to a preset condition. The preset condition and the number of ports in the SRS resource, and related.
在预设条件成立时,所述第一端口对应的初始循环移位值为:When the preset condition is met, the initial cyclic shift value corresponding to the first port is:
或者,
or,
在预设条件不成立时,所述第一端口对应的初始循环移位值为:When the preset condition is not met, the initial cyclic shift value corresponding to the first port is:
或者,
or,
一种可能的方式,该预设条件为 One possible approach is to presuppose
下面以为例,对循环移位偏置的应用举例说明。Below Take as an example the application of cyclic shift bias.
如图10所示,假设UE1和UE2的SRS资源均包含4个端口,且对应的循环移位值分别为:0、3、6、9和1、4、7、10。 As shown in FIG. 10 , it is assumed that the SRS resources of UE1 and UE2 both include 4 ports, and the corresponding cyclic shift values are 0, 3, 6, 9 and 1, 4, 7, 10 respectively.
假设UE1到TRP1没有时延,而到TRP2有长度约为总时延域1/12的时延;假设UE2到TRP2没有时延,而到TRP1有长度约为总时延域1/12的时延。此时两个TRP接收到的SRS信号如图10中的(a)所示,UE1对应SRS1,UE2对应SRS2,可见TRP2接收到的SRS信号,即SRS1和SRS2发生了碰撞。Assume that there is no delay from UE1 to TRP1, but there is a delay of about 1/12 of the total delay domain to TRP2; Assume that there is no delay from UE2 to TRP2, but there is a delay of about 1/12 of the total delay domain to TRP1. At this time, the SRS signals received by the two TRPs are shown in (a) of Figure 10. UE1 corresponds to SRS1, and UE2 corresponds to SRS2. It can be seen that the SRS signals received by TRP2, namely SRS1 and SRS2, collide.
假设UE2对应的第一方向b被配置为1,循环移位偏置取值粒度K配置为2,区间长度L配置为3,(此时随机化的区间就是从起始位置开始至向左1格CS的位置)。图中一格代表一个CS,总计12个CS。粒度K配置为2时,图中一格被划分为两个取值,比如CS0中包括取值0和0.5。Assume that the first direction b corresponding to UE2 is configured as 1, the granularity K of the cyclic shift bias value is configured as 2, and the interval length L is configured as 3 (the randomized interval is from the starting position to the position of 1 CS grid to the left). In the figure, one grid represents one CS, and there are 12 CSs in total. When the granularity K is configured as 2, one grid in the figure is divided into two values, for example, CS0 includes the values 0 and 0.5.
应理解,在该示例中,每个端口对应的循环移位偏置相同。It should be understood that, in this example, the cyclic shift offset corresponding to each port is the same.
当取值为-1时,相当于向左跳了0.5格(相对于图10中的(a)中各端口对应的CS位置而言),如图10中的(b)所示,TRP2接收到的不同信号(SRS1和SRS2)错开了一点,减少了一部分干扰。when When the value is -1, it is equivalent to jumping 0.5 grids to the left (relative to the CS positions corresponding to each port in (a) in Figure 10). As shown in (b) in Figure 10, the different signals (SRS1 and SRS2) received by TRP2 are offset a little, reducing some interference.
当取值为-2时,相当于向左跳了1格,如图10中的(c)所示,TRP2接收到的不同信号(SRS1和SRS2)完全错开,消除了干扰。when When the value is -2, it is equivalent to jumping 1 grid to the left, as shown in (c) of Figure 10. The different signals (SRS1 and SRS2) received by TRP2 are completely staggered, eliminating interference.
此外,由于限制了区间长度L,的最小只能取-2。以图10中的(a)中占用CS2的SRS为例,该SRS的位置最多偏移至CS1,不会偏移至CS0中。因此,并不会导致TRP1接收到的SRS信号发生碰撞。In addition, due to the limited interval length L, The minimum value can only be -2. Taking the SRS occupying CS2 in (a) of Figure 10 as an example, the position of the SRS is offset to CS1 at most, and will not be offset to CS0. Therefore, it will not cause the SRS signal received by TRP1 to collide.
该方式通过限制循环移位随机的范围,避免了原本没有发生碰撞的SRS信号因随机化而发生碰撞的可能。This method avoids the possibility of collision of SRS signals that originally did not collide due to randomization by limiting the random range of cyclic shift.
一种可能的实现,第一端口对应的循环移位值偏置满足下述关系:
In a possible implementation, the cyclic shift value offset corresponding to the first port satisfies the following relationship:
下面以为例,对循环移位偏置的应用举例说明。Below Take as an example the application of cyclic shift bias.
假设UE1和UE2的SRS资源均包含4个端口,UE1对应SRS1,对应的循环移位值为0、3、6、9,UE2对应SRS2,对应的循环移位值为1、4、7、10。Assume that the SRS resources of UE1 and UE2 both include 4 ports, UE1 corresponds to SRS1, and the corresponding cyclic shift values are 0, 3, 6, and 9; UE2 corresponds to SRS2, and the corresponding cyclic shift values are 1, 4, 7, and 10.
假设UE1到TRP1没有时延,而到TRP2有长度约为总时延域1/12的时延;假设UE2到TRP2没有时延,而到TRP1有长度约为总时延域1/24的时延;此时两个TRP接收到的SRS信号如图11中的(a)所示,可见TRP2接收到的SRS信号(SRS1和SRS2)发生了碰撞。Assume that there is no delay from UE1 to TRP1, but there is a delay of about 1/12 of the total delay domain to TRP2; assume that there is no delay from UE2 to TRP2, but there is a delay of about 1/24 of the total delay domain to TRP1; at this time, the SRS signals received by the two TRPs are shown in (a) of Figure 11, and it can be seen that the SRS signals (SRS1 and SRS2) received by TRP2 collided.
假设UE2循环移位偏置取值粒度K配置为2,区间长度L1和L2均配置为2,(此时随机化的区间就是从起始位置向左0.5格CS的位置至起始位置向右0.5格的位置)。Assume that the UE2 cyclic shift bias value granularity K is configured to 2, and the interval lengths L1 and L2 are both configured to 2 (in this case, the randomized interval is from the CS position 0.5 grids to the left of the starting position to the position 0.5 grids to the right of the starting position).
当取值为-1时,相当于向左跳了0.5格,如图11中的(b)所示,TRP2接收到的信号错开了一点,减少了一部分干扰。when When the value is -1, it is equivalent to jumping 0.5 grids to the left, as shown in (b) in Figure 11. The signal received by TRP2 is offset a little, reducing some interference.
当取值为1时,相当于向右跳了0.5格,如图11中的(c)所示,TRP2接收到的信号错开了一点,减少了一部分干扰。when When the value is 1, it is equivalent to jumping 0.5 grids to the right, as shown in (c) in Figure 11. The signal received by TRP2 is offset a little, reducing some interference.
此外,由于限制了区间长度L1和L2,只能取-1,0,1,以图11中的(a)中占用CS2的SRS为例,该SRS的位置最多偏移至CS1中,不会偏移至CS0中,所以并不会导致TRP1接收到的SRS信号发生碰撞。In addition, due to the restrictions on the interval lengths L1 and L2, It can only take -1, 0, 1. Taking the SRS occupying CS2 in (a) of Figure 11 as an example, the position of the SRS is offset to CS1 at most, and will not be offset to CS0, so it will not cause a collision with the SRS signal received by TRP1.
该方式能够提升SRS信号随机化的有效范围,增强通信性能。This method can increase the effective range of SRS signal randomization and enhance communication performance.
一种可能的实现,第一端口对应的循环移位值偏置满足下述关系:In a possible implementation, the cyclic shift value offset corresponding to the first port satisfies the following relationship:
或者,
or,
或者或者,
or or,
可选地,K的取值范围为{1,2,4}。Optionally, the value range of K is {1, 2, 4}.
可选地,L3的取值范围为 Optionally, the value range of L3 is
一种可能的实现,第一端口对应的循环移位值偏置满足下述关系:In a possible implementation, the cyclic shift value offset corresponding to the first port satisfies the following relationship:
或者, or,
或者 or
或者,
or,
可选的,L3的取值范围为 Optional, the value range of L3 is
可选地,K的取值范围为{1,2,4}。Optionally, the value range of K is {1, 2, 4}.
下面以为例,对循环移位偏置的应用举例说明。Below Take as an example the application of cyclic shift bias.
假设UE1的SRS资源包含4个端口,UE1对应SRS1,对应的循环移位值为0、3、6、9,UE2对应SRS2,对应的循环移位值为1、4、7、10。Assume that the SRS resource of UE1 includes 4 ports, UE1 corresponds to SRS1, and the corresponding cyclic shift values are 0, 3, 6, and 9; UE2 corresponds to SRS2, and the corresponding cyclic shift values are 1, 4, 7, and 10.
假设UE3对应SRS3,对应的循环移位值为1、4、7、10。UE3未在图中示出。Assume that UE3 corresponds to SRS3, and the corresponding cyclic shift values are 1, 4, 7, and 10. UE3 is not shown in the figure.
假设UE1到TRP1没有时延,而到TRP2有长度约为总时延域1/12的时延;假设UE2和UE3到TRP2没有时延,而到TRP1有长度约为总时延域1/12的时延。Assume that there is no delay from UE1 to TRP1, but there is a delay of about 1/12 of the total delay domain to TRP2; assume that there is no delay from UE2 and UE3 to TRP2, but there is a delay of about 1/12 of the total delay domain to TRP1.
此时两个TRP接收到的SRS信号如图12中的(a)所示,可见TRP2接收到的SRS信号发生了碰撞。假设UE2循环移位偏置取值粒度K被配置为1,区间长度L3配置为2,区间间隔Δ=3,此时取值范围为:{0,-1,-3,-4,-6,-7,-9,-10}。At this time, the SRS signals received by the two TRPs are shown in (a) of Figure 12. It can be seen that the SRS signal received by TRP2 has collided. Assume that the cyclic shift bias value granularity K of UE2 is configured as 1, the interval length L3 is configured as 2, and the interval interval Δ=3. The value range is: {0, -1, -3, -4, -6, -7, -9, -10}.
当时,相当于向左跳了1格,如图12中的(b)所示,TRP2接收到的信号完全错开,减少干扰。when When , it is equivalent to jumping 1 grid to the left, as shown in (b) in Figure 12, the signal received by TRP2 is completely staggered, reducing interference.
当取值为-3时,相当于向左跳了3格,如图12中的(c)所示。when When the value is -3, it is equivalent to jumping 3 squares to the left, as shown in (c) in Figure 12.
图12中的(d)、(e)、(f)分别对应于的情况。(d), (e), and (f) in Figure 12 correspond to situation.
由于不同的取值下,对于UE1而言,以UE1的第一个端口(端口1)为例,在取值为-1和取值-3时,端口1两次受到的干扰不同,这样可以达到干扰随机化的效果。Due to different For UE1, take the first port (port 1) of UE1 as an example. When the value is -1 or -3, the interference received by port 1 is different twice, thus achieving the effect of randomizing the interference.
另一个示例,假设UE1的SRS资源包含4个端口,UE1对应SRS1,对应的循环移位值为0、3、6、9,UE2对应SRS2,对应的循环移位值为1、4、7、10。For another example, assuming that the SRS resource of UE1 includes 4 ports, UE1 corresponds to SRS1, and the corresponding cyclic shift values are 0, 3, 6, and 9; UE2 corresponds to SRS2, and the corresponding cyclic shift values are 1, 4, 7, and 10.
假设UE3对应SRS3,对应的循环移位值为1、4、7、10。UE3未在图中示出。Assume that UE3 corresponds to SRS3, and the corresponding cyclic shift values are 1, 4, 7, and 10. UE3 is not shown in the figure.
假设UE1到TRP1没有时延,而到TRP2有长度约为总时延域1/12的时延;假设UE2和UE3到TRP2没有时延,而到TRP1有长度约为总时延域1/12的时延。Assume that there is no delay from UE1 to TRP1, but there is a delay of about 1/12 of the total delay domain to TRP2; assume that there is no delay from UE2 and UE3 to TRP2, but there is a delay of about 1/12 of the total delay domain to TRP1.
此时两个TRP接收到的SRS信号如图12中的(g)所示。At this time, the SRS signals received by the two TRPs are shown in (g) in Figure 12.
假设UE1循环移位偏置取值粒度K被配置为1,区间长度L3配置为2,区间间隔Δ=3,此时取值范围为:{0,1,3,4,6,7,9,10}。Assume that the cyclic shift bias value granularity K of UE1 is configured as 1, the interval length L3 is configured as 2, and the interval interval Δ=3. The value range is: {0, 1, 3, 4, 6, 7, 9, 10}.
具体地,当时,相当于向右跳了1格,如图12中的(h)所示,TRP2接收到的信号完全错开,减少干扰。Specifically, when When , it is equivalent to jumping 1 grid to the right, as shown in (h) in Figure 12, the signal received by TRP2 is completely staggered, reducing interference.
当取值为3时,相当于向右跳了3格,如图12中的(i)所示。when When the value is 3, it is equivalent to jumping 3 squares to the right, as shown in (i) in Figure 12.
图12中的(j)、(k)、(l)分别对应于的情况。(j), (k), and (l) in Figure 12 correspond to situation.
该情况中,扩大了端口循环移位随机化的范围,使SRS信号各端口对应的循环移位随时间在一个离散集合范围内进行变换,能够使得端口在不同时间面临不同的干扰,进一步提升了干扰随机化性能。In this case, the range of port cyclic shift randomization is expanded, so that the cyclic shift corresponding to each port of the SRS signal changes within a discrete set range over time, which enables the port to face different interference at different times, further improving the interference randomization performance.
综合来说,第一端口对应的循环移位满足下述关系:
In summary, the cyclic shift corresponding to the first port satisfies the following relationship:
其中函数g(x,y)=xmody或者或者,
The function g(x,y) = xmody or or,
其中函数g(x,y)=xmody或者或者,
The function g(x,y) = xmody or or,
其中函数g(x,y)=xmody或者或者,
The function g(x,y) = xmody or or,
其中函数g(x,y)=xmody或者或者,The function g(x,y) = xmody or or,
其中,αi为所述第一端口对应的循环移位,所述为所述第一端口对应的初始循环移位值,所述为最大循环移位值,所述为所述第一端口对应的循环移位参考索引,所述为N的取值,所述pi为所述第一端口的索引,所述为所述第一端口对应的循环移位值偏置。可选的,预设条件为
Wherein, α i is the cyclic shift corresponding to the first port, is the initial cyclic shift value corresponding to the first port, is the maximum cyclic shift value, is the cyclic shift reference index corresponding to the first port, is the value of N, the pi is the index of the first port, the is the cyclic shift value offset corresponding to the first port. Optionally, the preset condition is
其中,或者,in, or,
或者, or,
或者,
or,
其中函数g(x,y)=xmody或者或者,
The function g(x,y) = xmody or or,
其中,或者,in, or,
或者, or,
或者,
or,
其中函数g(x,y)=xmody或者或者,
The function g(x,y) = xmody or or,
其中,或者,in, or,
或者, or,
或者,
or,
其中函数g(x,y)=xmody或者或者,The function g(x,y) = xmody or or,
其中,αi为所述第一端口对应的循环移位,所述为所述第一端口对应的初始循环移位值,所述为最大循环移位值,所述为所述第一端口对应的循环移位参考索引,所述为N的取值,所述pi为所述第一端口的索引,所述为所述第一端口对应的循环移位值偏置,所述L为所述子区间长度。可选的,预设条件为 Wherein, α i is the cyclic shift corresponding to the first port, is the initial cyclic shift value corresponding to the first port, is the maximum cyclic shift value, is the cyclic shift reference index corresponding to the first port, is the value of N, the pi is the index of the first port, the is the cyclic shift value offset corresponding to the first port, and L is the length of the sub-interval. Optionally, the preset condition is
可选的,第一端口对应的循环移位于K有关。Optionally, the cyclic shift corresponding to the first port is related to K.
示例地,第一端口对应的循环移位满足下述关系:
For example, the cyclic shift corresponding to the first port satisfies the following relationship:
其中函数g(x,y)=xmody或者或者,
The function g(x,y) = xmody or or,
其中函数g(x,y)=xmody或者或者,
The function g(x,y) = xmody or or,
其中函数g(x,y)=xmody或者或者,
The function g(x,y) = xmody or or,
其中函数g(x,y)=xmody或者或者,
The function g(x,y) = xmody or or,
其中函数g(x,y)=xmody或者或者,
The function g(x,y) = xmody or or,
其中函数g(x,y)=xmody或者或者,
The function g(x,y) = xmody or or,
其中函数g(x,y)=xmody或者或者,
The function g(x,y) = xmody or or,
其中函数g(x,y)=xmody或者 The function g(x,y) = xmody or
其中,αi为所述第一端口对应的循环移位,所述为所述第一端口对应的初始循环移位值,所述为最大循环移位值,所述为所述第一端口对应的循环移位参考索引,所述为N的取值,所述pi为所述第一端口的索引,所述为所述第一端口对应的循环移位值偏置,所述K为第一取值粒度。可选的,预设条件为 Wherein, α i is the cyclic shift corresponding to the first port, is the initial cyclic shift value corresponding to the first port, is the maximum cyclic shift value, is the cyclic shift reference index corresponding to the first port, is the value of N, the pi is the index of the first port, the is the cyclic shift value offset corresponding to the first port, and K is the first value granularity. Optionally, the preset condition is
下面再结合第一端口对应的循环移位值偏置,列出几种对循环移位以及初始循环移位值的计算方式。第一端口对应的循环移位满足下述关系:
In the following, several calculation methods for the cyclic shift and the initial cyclic shift value are listed in combination with the cyclic shift value offset corresponding to the first port. The cyclic shift corresponding to the first port satisfies the following relationship:
或者, or,
或者, or,
或者, or,
或者, or,
或者, or,
或者, or,
或者,
or,
其中函数g(x,y)=xmody或者或者,
The function g(x,y) = xmody or or,
或者, or,
或者, or,
或者, or,
或者, or,
或者, or,
或者, or,
或者,
or,
其中函数g(x,y)=xmody或者或者,
The function g(x,y) = xmody or or,
或者, or,
或者, or,
或者, or,
或者, or,
或者, or,
或者, or,
或者,
or,
其中函数g(x,y)=xmody或者或者,
The function g(x,y) = xmody or or,
或者, or,
或者, or,
或者, or,
或者, or,
或者, or,
或者, or,
或者,
or,
其中函数g(x,y)=xmody或者或者,
The function g(x,y) = xmody or or,
或者, or,
或者, or,
或者, or,
或者, or,
或者, or,
或者, or,
或者, or,
或者, or,
其中函数g(x,y)=xmody或者或者,
The function g(x,y) = xmody or or,
或者, or,
或者, or,
或者, or,
或者, or,
或者, or,
或者, or,
或者, or,
或者, or,
其中函数g(x,y)=xmody或者或者,
The function g(x,y) = xmody or or,
或者, or,
或者, or,
或者, or,
或者, or,
或者, or,
或者, or,
或者, or,
或者, or,
其中函数g(x,y)=xmody或者或者,
The function g(x,y) = xmody or or,
或者, or,
或者, or,
或者, or,
或者, or,
或者, or,
或者, or,
或者, or,
或者, or,
其中函数g(x,y)=xmody或者 The function g(x,y) = xmody or
其中,αi为所述第一端口对应的循环移位,所述为所述第一端口对应的初始循环移位值,所述为最大循环移位值,所述为所述第一端口对应的循环移位参考索引,所述为N的取值,所述pi为所述第一端口的索引,所述为所述第一端口对应的循环移位值偏置,所述K为第一取值粒度,所述L为所述子区间长度。可选的,预设条件为 Wherein, α i is the cyclic shift corresponding to the first port, is the initial cyclic shift value corresponding to the first port, is the maximum cyclic shift value, is the cyclic shift reference index corresponding to the first port, is the value of N, the pi is the index of the first port, the is the cyclic shift value offset corresponding to the first port, K is the first value granularity, and L is the sub-interval length. Optionally, the preset condition is
下面以
Below
其中函数g(x,y)=xmody或者 The function g(x,y) = xmody or
为例,对循环移位偏置的应用举例说明。Take as an example the application of cyclic shift bias.
如图17所示,假设UE1和UE2的SRS资源均包含4个端口,且对应的循环移位值分别为:0、3、6、9和1、4、7、10。As shown in FIG. 17 , it is assumed that the SRS resources of UE1 and UE2 both include 4 ports, and the corresponding cyclic shift values are 0, 3, 6, 9 and 1, 4, 7, 10 respectively.
假设UE1不支持随机化,也就是说UE1对应的SRS的四个端口始终占用CS0、3、6、9;UE2采用所提的随机化方案可以避免与UE发生碰撞,假设UE2对应的子区间长度设置为2,图中一格代表一个CS,总计12个CS。Assume that UE1 does not support randomization, that is, the four ports of SRS corresponding to UE1 always occupy CS0, 3, 6, and 9; UE2 can avoid collision with UE by adopting the proposed randomization scheme. Assume that the sub-interval length corresponding to UE2 is set to 2. In the figure, one grid represents one CS, and there are 12 CSs in total.
应理解,在该示例中,每个端口对应的循环移位偏置相同。It should be understood that, in this example, the cyclic shift offset corresponding to each port is the same.
由于设置了子区间长度L为2,依据可以估算到的取值范围为{0,1}。Since the sub-interval length L is set to 2, according to It can be estimated The value range is {0, 1}.
当取值为0时,相当于没跳,如图17中的(a)所示,TRP2接收到的不同信号(SRS1和SRS2),此时UE1和UE2不会发生碰撞。when When the value is 0, it is equivalent to no jump, as shown in (a) of Figure 17, TRP2 receives different signals (SRS1 and SRS2), and UE1 and UE2 will not collide at this time.
当取值为1时,相当于向右跳了1格(相对于图17中的(a)中各端口对应的CS位置而言),如图17中的(b)所示,此时UE1和UE2不会发生碰撞。when When the value is 1, it is equivalent to jumping 1 grid to the right (relative to the CS position corresponding to each port in (a) in Figure 17), as shown in (b) in Figure 17. At this time, UE1 and UE2 will not collide.
而若取值为2时,相当于向右跳了2格(相对于图17中的(a)中各端口对应的CS位置而言),如图17中的(c)所示,此时UE1和UE2会发生碰撞,但由于设置了L为2,所以不会取值为2,所以避免了UE1和UE2碰撞的可能。And if When the value is 2, it is equivalent to jumping 2 squares to the right (relative to the CS positions corresponding to each port in (a) of Figure 17), as shown in (c) of Figure 17, at this time, UE1 and UE2 will collide, but because L is set to 2, The value will not be 2, thus avoiding the possibility of collision between UE1 and UE2.
以
by
其中函数g(x,y)=xmody或者 The function g(x,y) = xmody or
为例,对循环移位偏置的应用举例说明。Take as an example the application of cyclic shift bias.
如图18所示,假设UE1和UE2的SRS资源均包含4个端口,且对应的循环移位值分别为:0、3、6、9和1、4、7、10。As shown in FIG. 18 , it is assumed that the SRS resources of UE1 and UE2 both include 4 ports, and the corresponding cyclic shift values are 0, 3, 6, 9 and 1, 4, 7, 10 respectively.
假设UE1不支持随机化,也就是说UE1对应的SRS的四个端口始终占用CS0、3、6、9;UE2采用所提的随机化方案可以避免与UE发生碰撞,假设UE2对应的子区间长度L设置为2,区间间隔设置为3,图中一格代表一个CS,总计12个CS。Assume that UE1 does not support randomization, that is, the four ports of SRS corresponding to UE1 always occupy CS0, 3, 6, and 9; UE2 can avoid collision with UE by adopting the proposed randomization scheme. Assume that the sub-interval length L corresponding to UE2 is set to 2, and the interval interval is set to 3. In the figure, one grid represents one CS, and there are 12 CSs in total.
应理解,在该示例中,每个端口对应的循环移位偏置相同。It should be understood that, in this example, the cyclic shift offset corresponding to each port is the same.
由于设置了子区间长度L为2,依据可以估算到的取值范围为{0,1,3,4,6,7,9,10}Since the sub-interval length L is set to 2, according to It can be estimated The value range is {0, 1, 3, 4, 6, 7, 9, 10}
当取值为0时,相当于没跳,如图18中的(a)所示,TRP2接收到的不同信号(SRS1和SRS2),此时UE1和UE2不会发生碰撞。when When the value is 0, it is equivalent to no jump, as shown in (a) of Figure 18, TRP2 receives different signals (SRS1 and SRS2), and UE1 and UE2 will not collide at this time.
当取值为1时,相当于向右跳了1格(相对于图18中的(a)中各端口对应的CS位置而言),如图18中的(b)所示,此时UE1和UE2不会发生碰撞。when When the value is 1, it is equivalent to jumping 1 grid to the right (relative to the CS position corresponding to each port in (a) in Figure 18), as shown in (b) in Figure 18. At this time, UE1 and UE2 will not collide.
当取值为3时,相当于向右跳了3格(相对于图18中的(a)中各端口对应的CS位置而言),如图18中的(c)所示,此时UE1和UE2不会发生碰撞。when When the value is 3, it is equivalent to jumping 3 squares to the right (relative to the CS positions corresponding to each port in (a) in Figure 18), as shown in (c) in Figure 18. At this time, UE1 and UE2 will not collide.
当取值为4时,相当于向右跳了4格(相对于图18中的(a)中各端口对应的CS位置而言),如图18中的(d)所示,此时UE1和UE2不会发生碰撞。when When the value is 4, it is equivalent to jumping 4 squares to the right (relative to the CS positions corresponding to each port in (a) in Figure 18), as shown in (d) in Figure 18. At this time, UE1 and UE2 will not collide.
而若取值为2时,相当于向右跳了2格(相对于图18中的(a)中各端口对应的CS位置而言),如图18中的(e)所示,此时UE1和UE2会发生碰撞,但由于设置了L为2,所以不会取值为2,所以避免了UE1和UE2碰撞的可能。And if When the value is 2, it is equivalent to jumping 2 squares to the right (relative to the CS positions corresponding to each port in (a) of Figure 18), as shown in (e) of Figure 18, at this time, UE1 and UE2 will collide, but because L is set to 2, The value will not be 2, thus avoiding the possibility of collision between UE1 and UE2.
以
by
其中函数g(x,y)=xmody或者 The function g(x,y) = xmody or
为例,对循环移位偏置的应用举例说明。Take as an example the application of cyclic shift bias.
如图19所示,假设UE1和UE2的SRS资源均包含4个端口,且对应的循环移位值分别为:0、3、6、9和1、4、7、10。As shown in FIG. 19 , it is assumed that the SRS resources of UE1 and UE2 both include 4 ports, and the corresponding cyclic shift values are: 0, 3, 6, 9 and 1, 4, 7, 10 respectively.
假设UE1不支持随机化,也就是说UE1对应的SRS的四个端口始终占用CS0、3、6、9;UE2采用所提的随机化方案可以避免与UE发生碰撞,假设UE2对应的子区间长度设置为2,取值粒度K设置为2,图中一格代表一个CS,总计12个CS。Assume that UE1 does not support randomization, that is, the four ports of SRS corresponding to UE1 always occupy CS0, 3, 6, and 9; UE2 can avoid collision with UE by adopting the proposed randomization scheme. Assume that the sub-interval length corresponding to UE2 is set to 2, and the value granularity K is set to 2. In the figure, one grid represents one CS, and there are 12 CSs in total.
应理解,在该示例中,每个端口对应的循环移位偏置相同。It should be understood that, in this example, the cyclic shift offset corresponding to each port is the same.
由于设置了子区间长度L为2,(为了解释说明)依据可以估算到的取值范围为{0,0.5,1,1.5}Since the sub-interval length L is set to 2, (for explanation) according to It can be estimated The value range is {0, 0.5, 1, 1.5}
当取值为0时,相当于没跳,如图19中的(a)所示,TRP2接收到的不同信号(SRS1和SRS2),此时UE1和UE2不会发生碰撞。when When the value is 0, it is equivalent to no jump, as shown in (a) of Figure 19, TRP2 receives different signals (SRS1 and SRS2), and UE1 and UE2 will not collide at this time.
当取值为0.5时,相当于向右跳了0.5格(相对于图19中的(a)中各端口对应的CS位置而 言),如图19中的(b)所示,此时UE1和UE2不会发生碰撞。when When the value is 0.5, it is equivalent to jumping 0.5 grids to the right (relative to the CS position corresponding to each port in (a) of Figure 19). As shown in (b) of FIG19 , UE1 and UE2 will not collide at this time.
当取值为1时,相当于向右跳了1格(相对于图19中的(a)中各端口对应的CS位置而言),如图19中的(c)所示,此时UE1和UE2不会发生碰撞。when When the value is 1, it is equivalent to jumping 1 grid to the right (relative to the CS position corresponding to each port in (a) in Figure 19), as shown in (c) in Figure 19. At this time, UE1 and UE2 will not collide.
而若取值为2时,相当于向右跳了2格(相对于图19中的(a)中各端口对应的CS位置而言),如图19中的(d)所示,此时UE1和UE2会发生碰撞,但由于设置了L为2,所以不会取值为2,所以避免了UE1和UE2碰撞的可能。And if When the value is 2, it is equivalent to jumping 2 squares to the right (relative to the CS positions corresponding to each port in (a) of Figure 19), as shown in (d) of Figure 19, at this time, UE1 and UE2 will collide, but because L is set to 2, The value will not be 2, thus avoiding the possibility of collision between UE1 and UE2.
方案在保证UE1和UE2不发生碰撞的前提下提升了UE2可以跳的位置,增加了随机化增益。The solution improves the position where UE2 can jump while ensuring that UE1 and UE2 do not collide, thereby increasing the randomization gain.
下面以
Below
其中函数g(x,y)=xmody或者 The function g(x,y) = xmody or
为例,对循环移位偏置的应用举例说明。Take as an example the application of cyclic shift bias.
如图20所示,假设UE1和UE2的SRS资源均包含4个端口,且对应的循环移位值分别为:0、3、6、9和1、4、7、10。As shown in FIG. 20 , it is assumed that the SRS resources of UE1 and UE2 both include 4 ports, and the corresponding cyclic shift values are: 0, 3, 6, 9 and 1, 4, 7, 10 respectively.
假设UE1不支持随机化,也就是说UE1对应的SRS的四个端口始终占用CS0、3、6、9;UE2采用所提的随机化方案可以避免与UE发生碰撞,假设UE2对应的子区间长度设置为3,取值粒度K设置为2,图中一格代表一个CS,总计12个CS。Assume that UE1 does not support randomization, that is, the four ports of SRS corresponding to UE1 always occupy CS0, 3, 6, and 9; UE2 can avoid collision with UE by adopting the proposed randomization scheme. Assume that the sub-interval length corresponding to UE2 is set to 3, and the value granularity K is set to 2. In the figure, one grid represents one CS, and there are 12 CSs in total.
应理解,在该示例中,每个端口对应的循环移位偏置相同。It should be understood that, in this example, the cyclic shift offset corresponding to each port is the same.
由于设置了子区间长度L为3,依据可以估算到的取值范围为{0,0.5,1}Since the sub-interval length L is set to 3, according to It can be estimated The value range is {0, 0.5, 1}
当取值为0时,相当于没跳,如图20中的(a)所示,TRP2接收到的不同信号(SRS1和SRS2),此时UE1和UE2不会发生碰撞。when When the value is 0, it is equivalent to no jump, as shown in (a) of Figure 20, TRP2 receives different signals (SRS1 and SRS2), and UE1 and UE2 will not collide at this time.
当取值为0.5时,相当于向右跳了0.5格(相对于图20中的(a)中各端口对应的CS位置而言),如图20中的(b)所示,此时UE1和UE2不会发生碰撞。when When the value is 0.5, it is equivalent to jumping 0.5 grids to the right (relative to the CS positions corresponding to each port in (a) in Figure 20), as shown in (b) in Figure 20. At this time, UE1 and UE2 will not collide.
当取值为1时,相当于向右跳了1格(相对于图20中的(a)中各端口对应的CS位置而言),如图20中的(c)所示,此时UE1和UE2不会发生碰撞。when When the value is 1, it is equivalent to jumping 1 grid to the right (relative to the CS position corresponding to each port in (a) in Figure 20), as shown in (c) in Figure 20. At this time, UE1 and UE2 will not collide.
而若取值为2时,相当于向右跳了2格(相对于图20中的(a)中各端口对应的CS位置而言),如图20中的(d)所示,此时UE1和UE2会发生碰撞,但由于设置了L为2,所以不会取值为2,所以避免了UE1和UE2碰撞的可能。And if When the value is 2, it is equivalent to jumping 2 squares to the right (relative to the CS positions corresponding to each port in (a) of Figure 20), as shown in (d) of Figure 20. At this time, UE1 and UE2 will collide, but because L is set to 2, The value will not be 2, thus avoiding the possibility of collision between UE1 and UE2.
方案在保证UE1和UE2不发生碰撞的前提下提升了UE2可以跳的位置,增加了随机化增益。The solution improves the position where UE2 can jump while ensuring that UE1 and UE2 do not collide, thereby increasing the randomization gain.
以
by
其中函数g(x,y)=xmody或者 The function g(x,y) = xmody or
为例,对循环移位偏置的应用举例说明。Take as an example the application of cyclic shift bias.
如图21所示,假设UE1和UE2的SRS资源均包含4个端口,且对应的循环移位值分别为:0、3、6、9和1、4、7、10。As shown in FIG. 21 , it is assumed that the SRS resources of UE1 and UE2 both include 4 ports, and the corresponding cyclic shift values are 0, 3, 6, 9 and 1, 4, 7, 10 respectively.
假设UE1不支持随机化,也就是说UE1对应的SRS的四个端口始终占用CS0、3、6、9;UE2采用所提的随机化方案可以避免与UE发生碰撞,假设UE2对应的子区间长度L3设置为2,区间间隔设置为3,取值粒度设置为2,图中一格代表一个CS,总计12个CS。Assume that UE1 does not support randomization, that is, the four ports of SRS corresponding to UE1 always occupy CS0, 3, 6, and 9; UE2 can avoid collision with UE by adopting the proposed randomization scheme. Assume that the sub-interval length L3 corresponding to UE2 is set to 2, the interval interval is set to 3, and the value granularity is set to 2. In the figure, one grid represents one CS, and there are 12 CSs in total.
应理解,在该示例中,每个端口对应的循环移位偏置相同。It should be understood that, in this example, the cyclic shift offset corresponding to each port is the same.
由于设置了子区间长度L为2,依据 Since the sub-interval length L is set to 2, according to
可以估算到的取值范围为{0,0.5,1,1.5,3,3.5,4,4.5,6,6.5,7,7.5,9,9.5,10,10.5}It can be estimated The value range is {0, 0.5, 1, 1.5, 3, 3.5, 4, 4.5, 6, 6.5, 7, 7.5, 9, 9.5, 10, 10.5}
当取值为0时,相当于没跳,如图21中的(a)所示,TRP2接收到的不同信号(SRS1和SRS2),此时UE1和UE2不会发生碰撞。when When the value is 0, it is equivalent to no jump, as shown in (a) of Figure 21, TRP2 receives different signals (SRS1 and SRS2), and UE1 and UE2 will not collide at this time.
当取值为0.5时,相当于向右跳了0.5格(相对于图21中的(a)中各端口对应的CS位置而言),如图21中的(b)所示,此时UE1和UE2不会发生碰撞。when When the value is 0.5, it is equivalent to jumping 0.5 grids to the right (relative to the CS positions corresponding to each port in (a) in Figure 21), as shown in (b) in Figure 21. At this time, UE1 and UE2 will not collide.
当取值为1时,相当于向右跳了1格(相对于图21中的(a)中各端口对应的CS位置而言),如图21中的(c)所示,此时UE1和UE2不会发生碰撞。when When the value is 1, it is equivalent to jumping 1 grid to the right (relative to the CS position corresponding to each port in (a) in Figure 21), as shown in (c) in Figure 21. At this time, UE1 and UE2 will not collide.
当取值为3时,相当于向右跳了3格(相对于图21中的(a)中各端口对应的CS位置而言),如图21中的(d)所示,此时UE1和UE2不会发生碰撞。when When the value is 3, it is equivalent to jumping 3 squares to the right (relative to the CS positions corresponding to each port in (a) in Figure 21), as shown in (d) in Figure 21. At this time, UE1 and UE2 will not collide.
当取值为3.5时,相当于向右跳了3.5格(相对于图21中的(a)中各端口对应的CS位置而言),如图21中的(e)所示,此时UE1和UE2不会发生碰撞。when When the value is 3.5, it is equivalent to jumping 3.5 grids to the right (relative to the CS positions corresponding to each port in (a) in Figure 21), as shown in (e) in Figure 21. At this time, UE1 and UE2 will not collide.
而若取值为3时,相当于向右跳了3格(相对于图21中的(a)中各端口对应的CS位置而言),如图21中的(f)所示,此时UE1和UE2会发生碰撞,但由于设置了L为2,所以不会取值为2,所以避免了UE1和UE2碰撞的可能。And if When the value is 3, it is equivalent to jumping 3 squares to the right (relative to the CS positions corresponding to each port in (a) of Figure 21), as shown in (f) of Figure 21. At this time, UE1 and UE2 will collide, but because L is set to 2, The value will not be 2, thus avoiding the possibility of collision between UE1 and UE2.
以
by
其中函数g(x,y)=xmody或者 The function g(x,y) = xmody or
为例,对循环移位偏置的应用举例说明。Take as an example the application of cyclic shift bias.
如图22所示,假设UE1和UE2的SRS资源均包含4个端口,且对应的循环移位值分别为:0、3、6、9和1、4、7、10。As shown in FIG. 22 , it is assumed that the SRS resources of UE1 and UE2 both include 4 ports, and the corresponding cyclic shift values are 0, 3, 6, 9 and 1, 4, 7, 10 respectively.
假设UE1不支持随机化,也就是说UE1对应的SRS的四个端口始终占用CS0、3、6、9;UE2采用所提的随机化方案可以避免与UE发生碰撞,假设UE2对应的子区间长度L3设置为4,区间间隔设置为3,取值粒度设置为2,图中一格代表一个CS,总计12个CS。Assume that UE1 does not support randomization, that is, the four ports of SRS corresponding to UE1 always occupy CS0, 3, 6, and 9; UE2 can avoid collision with UE by adopting the proposed randomization scheme. Assume that the sub-interval length L3 corresponding to UE2 is set to 4, the interval is set to 3, and the value granularity is set to 2. In the figure, one grid represents one CS, and there are 12 CSs in total.
应理解,在该示例中,每个端口对应的循环移位偏置相同。It should be understood that, in this example, the cyclic shift offset corresponding to each port is the same.
由于设置了子区间长度L为4,(为了解释说明)依据
Since the sub-interval length L is set to 4, (for explanation) according to
可以估算到的取值范围为{0,0.5,1,1.5,3,3.5,4,4.5,6,6.5,7,7.5,9,9.5,10,10.5}It can be estimated The value range is {0, 0.5, 1, 1.5, 3, 3.5, 4, 4.5, 6, 6.5, 7, 7.5, 9, 9.5, 10, 10.5}
当取值为0时,相当于没跳,如图22中的(a)所示,TRP2接收到的不同信号(SRS1和SRS2),此时UE1和UE2不会发生碰撞。when When the value is 0, it is equivalent to no jump, as shown in (a) of Figure 22, TRP2 receives different signals (SRS1 and SRS2), and UE1 and UE2 will not collide at this time.
当取值为0.5时,相当于向右跳了0.5格(相对于图22中的(a)中各端口对应的CS位置而言),如图22中的(b)所示,此时UE1和UE2不会发生碰撞。when When the value is 0.5, it is equivalent to jumping 0.5 grids to the right (relative to the CS positions corresponding to each port in (a) in Figure 22), as shown in (b) in Figure 22. At this time, UE1 and UE2 will not collide.
当取值为1时,相当于向右跳了1格(相对于图22中的(a)中各端口对应的CS位置而言),如图22中的(c)所示,此时UE1和UE2不会发生碰撞。when When the value is 1, it is equivalent to jumping 1 grid to the right (relative to the CS position corresponding to each port in (a) in Figure 22), as shown in (c) in Figure 22. At this time, UE1 and UE2 will not collide.
当取值为3时,相当于向右跳了3格(相对于图22中的(a)中各端口对应的CS位置而言),如图22中的(d)所示,此时UE1和UE2不会发生碰撞。when When the value is 3, it is equivalent to jumping 3 squares to the right (relative to the CS positions corresponding to each port in (a) in Figure 22), as shown in (d) in Figure 22. At this time, UE1 and UE2 will not collide.
当取值为3.5时,相当于向右跳了3.5格(相对于图22中的(a)中各端口对应的CS位置而言),如图22中的(e)所示,此时UE1和UE2不会发生碰撞。when When the value is 3.5, it is equivalent to jumping 3.5 grids to the right (relative to the CS positions corresponding to each port in (a) in Figure 22), as shown in (e) in Figure 22. At this time, UE1 and UE2 will not collide.
而若取值为3时,相当于向右跳了3格(相对于图22中的(a)中各端口对应的CS位置而言),如图22中的(f)所示,此时UE1和UE2会发生碰撞,但由于设置了L为2,所以不会取值为2,所以避免了UE1和UE2碰撞的可能。And if When the value is 3, it is equivalent to jumping 3 squares to the right (relative to the CS positions corresponding to each port in (a) of Figure 22), as shown in (f) of Figure 22. At this time, UE1 and UE2 will collide, but because L is set to 2, The value will not be 2, thus avoiding the possibility of collision between UE1 and UE2.
以
by
其中函数g(x,y)=xmody或者 The function g(x,y) = xmody or
为例,对循环移位偏置的应用举例说明。Take as an example the application of cyclic shift bias.
如图23所示,假设UE1和UE2的SRS资源均包含4个端口,且对应的循环移位值分别为:0、3、6、9和1、4、7、10。As shown in FIG. 23 , it is assumed that the SRS resources of UE1 and UE2 both include 4 ports, and the corresponding cyclic shift values are 0, 3, 6, 9 and 1, 4, 7, 10 respectively.
假设UE1不支持随机化,也就是说UE1对应的SRS的四个端口始终占用CS0、3、6、9;UE2采用所提的随机化方案可以避免与UE发生碰撞,假设UE2对应的子区间长度设置为2,取值粒度设置为2,图中一格代表一个CS,总计12个CS。Assume that UE1 does not support randomization, that is, the four ports of SRS corresponding to UE1 always occupy CS0, 3, 6, and 9; UE2 can avoid collision with UE by adopting the proposed randomization scheme. Assume that the sub-interval length corresponding to UE2 is set to 2, and the value granularity is set to 2. In the figure, one grid represents one CS, and there are 12 CSs in total.
应理解,在该示例中,每个端口对应的循环移位偏置相同。It should be understood that, in this example, the cyclic shift offset corresponding to each port is the same.
由于设置了子区间长度L为2,(为了解释说明)依据可以估算到的取值范围为{0,0.5,1}Since the sub-interval length L is set to 2, (for explanation) according to It can be estimated The value range is {0, 0.5, 1}
当取值为0时,相当于没跳,如图23中的(a)所示,TRP2接收到的不同信号(SRS1和SRS2),此时UE1和UE2不会发生碰撞。when When the value is 0, it is equivalent to no jump, as shown in (a) of Figure 23, TRP2 receives different signals (SRS1 and SRS2), and UE1 and UE2 will not collide at this time.
当取值为0.5时,相当于向右跳了0.5格(相对于图23中的(a)中各端口对应的CS位置而言),如图23中的(b)所示,此时UE1和UE2不会发生碰撞。when When the value is 0.5, it is equivalent to jumping 0.5 grids to the right (relative to the CS positions corresponding to each port in (a) in Figure 23), as shown in (b) in Figure 23. At this time, UE1 and UE2 will not collide.
而若取值为1时,相当于向右跳了1格(相对于图23中的(a)中各端口对应的CS位置而言),如图23中的(c)所示,此时UE1和UE2会发生碰撞,但由于设置了L为2,所以不会取值为2,所以避免了UE1和UE2碰撞的可能。And if When the value is 1, it is equivalent to jumping 1 grid to the right (relative to the CS position corresponding to each port in (a) of Figure 23), as shown in (c) of Figure 23, UE1 and UE2 will collide at this time, but because L is set to 2, The value will not be 2, thus avoiding the possibility of collision between UE1 and UE2.
以
by
其中函数g(x,y)=xmody或者 The function g(x,y) = xmody or
为例,对循环移位偏置的应用举例说明。Take as an example the application of cyclic shift bias.
如图24所示,假设UE1和UE2的SRS资源均包含4个端口,且对应的循环移位值分别为:0、3、6、9和1、4、7、10。As shown in FIG. 24 , it is assumed that the SRS resources of UE1 and UE2 both include 4 ports, and the corresponding cyclic shift values are: 0, 3, 6, 9 and 1, 4, 7, 10 respectively.
假设UE1不支持随机化,也就是说UE1对应的SRS的四个端口始终占用CS0、3、6、9;UE2采用所提的随机化方案可以避免与UE发生碰撞,假设UE2对应的子区间长度设置为2,取值粒度设置为2,区间间隔设置为3,图中一格代表一个CS,总计12个CS。Assume that UE1 does not support randomization, that is, the four ports of SRS corresponding to UE1 always occupy CS0, 3, 6, and 9; UE2 can avoid collision with UE by adopting the proposed randomization scheme. Assume that the sub-interval length corresponding to UE2 is set to 2, the value granularity is set to 2, and the interval interval is set to 3. In the figure, one grid represents one CS, and there are 12 CSs in total.
应理解,在该示例中,每个端口对应的循环移位偏置相同。It should be understood that, in this example, the cyclic shift offset corresponding to each port is the same.
由于设置了子区间长度L为2,(为了解释说明)依据 可以估算到的取值范围为{0,0.5,1,3,3.5,4,6,6.5,7,9,9.5,10}Since the sub-interval length L is set to 2, (for explanation) according to It can be estimated The value range is {0, 0.5, 1, 3, 3.5, 4, 6, 6.5, 7, 9, 9.5, 10}
当取值为0时,相当于没跳,如图24中的(a)所示,TRP2接收到的不同信号(SRS1和SRS2),此时UE1和UE2不会发生碰撞。when When the value is 0, it is equivalent to no jump, as shown in (a) of Figure 24, TRP2 receives different signals (SRS1 and SRS2), and UE1 and UE2 will not collide at this time.
当取值为0.5时,相当于向右跳了0.5格(相对于图24中的(a)中各端口对应的CS位置而言),如图24中的(b)所示,此时UE1和UE2不会发生碰撞。when When the value is 0.5, it is equivalent to jumping 0.5 grids to the right (relative to the CS positions corresponding to each port in (a) in Figure 24), as shown in (b) in Figure 24. At this time, UE1 and UE2 will not collide.
当取值为1时,相当于向右跳了1格(相对于图24中的(a)中各端口对应的CS位置而言),如图24中的(c)所示,此时UE1和UE2不会发生碰撞。when When the value is 1, it is equivalent to jumping 1 grid to the right (relative to the CS position corresponding to each port in (a) in Figure 24), as shown in (c) in Figure 24. At this time, UE1 and UE2 will not collide.
当取值为3时,相当于向右跳了3格(相对于图24中的(a)中各端口对应的CS位置而言),如图24中的(d)所示,此时UE1和UE2不会发生碰撞。when When the value is 3, it is equivalent to jumping 3 squares to the right (relative to the CS positions corresponding to each port in (a) in Figure 24), as shown in (d) in Figure 24. At this time, UE1 and UE2 will not collide.
当取值为3.5时,相当于向右跳了3.5格(相对于图24中的(a)中各端口对应的CS位置而言),如图24中的(e)所示,此时UE1和UE2不会发生碰撞。when When the value is 3.5, it is equivalent to jumping 3.5 grids to the right (relative to the CS positions corresponding to each port in (a) in Figure 24), as shown in (e) in Figure 24. At this time, UE1 and UE2 will not collide.
而若取值为2时,相当于向右跳了3格(相对于图24中的(a)中各端口对应的CS位置而言),如图24中的(f)所示,此时UE1和UE2会发生碰撞,但由于设置了L为2,所以不会取值为2,所以避免了UE1和UE2碰撞的可能。And if When the value is 2, it is equivalent to jumping 3 squares to the right (relative to the CS positions corresponding to each port in (a) of Figure 24), as shown in (f) of Figure 24. At this time, UE1 and UE2 will collide, but because L is set to 2, The value will not be 2, thus avoiding the possibility of collision between UE1 and UE2.
在本申请中,子区间长度有两种理解,一种是子区间包含的元素的个数,一种是子区间包含的整数的个数。子区间内的元素个数可能多于L。可选的,子区间内元素的个数等于KL或KL-1或KL+1。In this application, there are two interpretations of subinterval length: one is the number of elements contained in the subinterval, and the other is the number of integers contained in the subinterval. The number of elements in a subinterval may be more than L. Optionally, the number of elements in a subinterval is equal to KL or KL-1 or KL+1.
可选地,该方法还可以包括:Optionally, the method may further include:
S940,终端设备向网络设备发送SRS,对应地,网络设备接收该SRS。S940, the terminal device sends an SRS to the network device, and correspondingly, the network device receives the SRS.
示例地,终端设备在根据循环移位确定的SRS资源上向网络设备发送SRS,对应地,网络设备在该SRS资源上接收该SRS。For example, the terminal device sends an SRS to the network device on an SRS resource determined according to the cyclic shift, and correspondingly, the network device receives the SRS on the SRS resource.
应理解,这里的终端设备可以是被配置了循环移位的终端设备。或者说,该终端设备可以是通信系统中的任一终端设备。同理,该网络设备可以是通信系统中的任一网络设备。It should be understood that the terminal device here may be a terminal device configured with cyclic shift. In other words, the terminal device may be any terminal device in the communication system. Similarly, the network device may be any network device in the communication system.
换句话说,通信系统中的多个终端设备可以向多个网络设备发送SRS。示例地,UE1向TRP1发送SRS1,对应地,TRP1接收SRS1。UE2向TRP2发送SRS2,对应地,TRP2接收SRS2。In other words, multiple terminal devices in the communication system can send SRS to multiple network devices. For example, UE1 sends SRS1 to TRP1, and correspondingly, TRP1 receives SRS1. UE2 sends SRS2 to TRP2, and correspondingly, TRP2 receives SRS2.
可选地,该方法还可以包括下述步骤:Optionally, the method may further include the following steps:
S950,网络设备根据SRS确定信道状态。S950: The network device determines a channel state according to the SRS.
该方法细化设计了SRS各端口对应的循环移位值随机选取的区间。具体来说,SRS各端口对应的循环移位值会随时间变化而变化,循环移位值的变化方式是在确定的区间内随机选取。网络设备为终端设备配置了精细的随机选取循环移位值的区间,避免了原本不会碰撞的SRS信号发生碰撞的可能,保证了SRS的正交,使得网络设备能够获取准确的信道状态,进一步根据该信道状态执行数据调度,能够提升通信质量。This method refines the design of the randomly selected intervals of the cyclic shift values corresponding to each SRS port. Specifically, the cyclic shift values corresponding to each SRS port will change over time, and the cyclic shift values are randomly selected within a certain interval. The network device configures a fine interval of randomly selected cyclic shift values for the terminal device, avoiding the possibility of collision of SRS signals that would not collide, ensuring the orthogonality of SRS, and enabling the network device to obtain accurate channel status, and further perform data scheduling based on the channel status, which can improve communication quality.
应理解,本申请实施例中的图9至图12所示的具体的例子只是为了帮助本领域技术人员更好地理解本申请实施例,而非限制本申请实施例的范围。例如,具体实施例中的流程均以参考信号为SRS为例进行描述,并不限定本申请提供的无线通信方法只能适用于SRS配置,其他涉及到确定循环移位偏移值的 流程中也同样适用。It should be understood that the specific examples shown in Figures 9 to 12 of the embodiments of the present application are only intended to help those skilled in the art better understand the embodiments of the present application, and do not limit the scope of the embodiments of the present application. For example, the processes in the specific embodiments are described by taking the reference signal as SRS as an example, and do not limit the wireless communication method provided by the present application to only be applicable to SRS configuration. Other processes involving determining the cyclic shift offset value The same applies to processes.
还应理解,上述各过程的序号的大小并不意味着执行顺序的先后,各过程的执行顺序应以其功能和内在逻辑确定,而不应对本申请实施例的实施过程构成任何限定。It should also be understood that the size of the serial numbers of the above-mentioned processes does not mean the order of execution. The execution order of each process should be determined by its function and internal logic, and should not constitute any limitation on the implementation process of the embodiments of the present application.
还应理解,在本申请的各个实施例中,如果没有特殊说明以及逻辑冲突,不同的实施例之间的术语和/或描述具有一致性、且可以相互引用,不同的实施例中的技术特征根据其内在的逻辑关系可以组合形成新的实施例。It should also be understood that in the various embodiments of the present application, unless otherwise specified or there is a logical conflict, the terms and/or descriptions between different embodiments are consistent and can be referenced to each other, and the technical features in different embodiments can be combined to form new embodiments according to their internal logical relationships.
还应理解,在上述一些实施例中,主要以现有的网络架构中的设备为例进行了示例性说明(如网络设备,终端设备等),应理解,对于设备的具体形式本申请实施例不作限定。例如,在未来可以实现同样功能的设备都适用于本申请实施例。It should also be understood that in some of the above embodiments, the devices in the existing network architecture are mainly used as examples for exemplary description (such as network devices, terminal devices, etc.), and it should be understood that the specific form of the device is not limited in the embodiments of the present application. For example, devices that can achieve the same function in the future are applicable to the embodiments of the present application.
可以理解的是,上述各个方法实施例中,由网络设备实现的方法和操作,也可以由可用于网络设备的部件实现;由终端设备实现的方法和操作,也可以由可用于终端设备的部件实现。It can be understood that in the above-mentioned method embodiments, the methods and operations implemented by the network device can also be implemented by components that can be used for the network device; the methods and operations implemented by the terminal device can also be implemented by components that can be used for the terminal device.
以上,结合图9至图12详细说明了本申请实施例提供的通信方法。上述通信方法主要从网络设备和终端设备之间交互的角度进行了介绍。可以理解的是,网络设备和终端设备,为了实现上述功能,其包含了执行各个功能相应的硬件结构和/或软件模块。The communication method provided by the embodiment of the present application is described in detail above in conjunction with Figures 9 to 12. The above communication method is mainly introduced from the perspective of interaction between a network device and a terminal device. It can be understood that the network device and the terminal device, in order to implement the above functions, include hardware structures and/or software modules corresponding to the execution of each function.
本领域技术人员应该可以意识到,结合本文中所公开的实施例描述的各示例的单元及算法步骤,本申请能够以硬件或硬件和计算机软件的结合形式来实现。某个功能究竟以硬件还是计算机软件驱动硬件的方式来执行,取决于技术方案的特定应用和设计约束条件。专业技术人员可以对每个特定的应用来使用不同方法来实现所描述的功能,但是这种实现不应认为超出本申请的范围。Those skilled in the art should be aware that, in combination with the units and algorithm steps of each example described in the embodiments disclosed herein, the present application can be implemented in the form of hardware or a combination of hardware and computer software. Whether a function is executed in the form of hardware or computer software driving hardware depends on the specific application and design constraints of the technical solution. Professional and technical personnel can use different methods to implement the described functions for each specific application, but such implementation should not be considered to be beyond the scope of this application.
以下,结合图13至图16详细说明本申请实施例提供的通信装置。应理解,装置实施例的描述与方法实施例的描述相互对应,因此,未详细描述的内容可以参见上文方法实施例,为了简洁,部分内容不再赘述。The communication device provided in the embodiment of the present application is described in detail below in conjunction with Figures 13 to 16. It should be understood that the description of the device embodiment corresponds to the description of the method embodiment, so the content not described in detail can refer to the above method embodiment, and for the sake of brevity, some content will not be repeated.
本申请实施例可以根据上述方法示例对发射端设备或者接收端设备进行功能模块的划分,例如,可以对应各个功能划分各个功能模块,也可以将两个或两个以上的功能集成在一个处理模块中。上述集成的模块既可以采用硬件的形式实现,也可以采用软件功能模块的形式实现。需要说明的是,本申请实施例中对模块的划分是示意性的,仅仅为一种逻辑功能划分,实际实现时可以有另外的划分方式。下面以采用对应各个功能划分各个功能模块为例进行说明。The embodiment of the present application can divide the functional modules of the transmitting end device or the receiving end device according to the above method example. For example, each functional module can be divided corresponding to each function, or two or more functions can be integrated into one processing module. The above integrated module can be implemented in the form of hardware or in the form of software functional modules. It should be noted that the division of modules in the embodiment of the present application is schematic and is only a logical functional division. There may be other division methods in actual implementation. The following is an example of dividing each functional module corresponding to each function.
参见图13,图13是本申请提出的通信装置1300的示意图。如图13所示,装置1300包括接收单元1310和处理单元1320。Referring to FIG13 , FIG13 is a schematic diagram of a communication device 1300 proposed in the present application. As shown in FIG13 , the device 1300 includes a receiving unit 1310 and a processing unit 1320 .
接收单元1310,用于接收SRS资源的配置信息;The receiving unit 1310 is configured to receive configuration information of SRS resources;
处理单元1320,用于根据SRS资源的配置信息确定第一端口对应的循环移位值偏置。The processing unit 1320 is configured to determine a cyclic shift value offset corresponding to the first port according to the configuration information of the SRS resource.
装置1300和方法实施例中的终端设备对应,装置1300可以是方法实施例中的终端设备,或者方法实施例中的终端设备内部的芯片或功能模块。装置1300的相应单元用于执行图5所示的方法实施例中由终端设备执行的相应步骤。The apparatus 1300 corresponds to the terminal device in the method embodiment, and the apparatus 1300 may be the terminal device in the method embodiment, or a chip or functional module inside the terminal device in the method embodiment. The corresponding units of the apparatus 1300 are used to execute the corresponding steps executed by the terminal device in the method embodiment shown in FIG. 5 .
其中,装置1300中的处理单元1320用于执行方法实施例中终端设备对应与处理相关的步骤。例如,执行图9中步骤S930。The processing unit 1320 in the device 1300 is used to execute the steps related to the processing corresponding to the terminal device in the method embodiment, for example, executing step S930 in FIG. 9 .
装置1300中的接收单元1310用于执行方法实施例中终端设备接收步骤。例如,执行图5中接收第一SRS对应的循环移位偏移值的步骤S920。The receiving unit 1310 in the apparatus 1300 is used to execute the terminal device receiving step in the method embodiment, for example, executing step S920 of receiving the cyclic shift offset value corresponding to the first SRS in FIG5 .
装置1300还可以包括发送单元,用于执行方法实施例中终端设备发送的步骤。例如,向其他设备发送信息。发送单元和接收单元1310可以组成收发单元,同时具有接收和发送的功能。其中,处理单元1320可以是至少一个处理器。发送单元可以是发射器或者接口电路,接收单元1310可以是接收器或者接口电路。接收器和发射器可以集成在一起组成收发器或者接口电路。The apparatus 1300 may further include a sending unit for executing the step of sending by the terminal device in the method embodiment. For example, sending information to other devices. The sending unit and the receiving unit 1310 may form a transceiver unit, which has the functions of receiving and sending. Among them, the processing unit 1320 may be at least one processor. The sending unit may be a transmitter or an interface circuit, and the receiving unit 1310 may be a receiver or an interface circuit. The receiver and the transmitter may be integrated together to form a transceiver or an interface circuit.
该发送单元可以用于发送SRS。The sending unit may be configured to send an SRS.
可选的,装置1300还可以包括存储单元,用于存储数据和/或信令,处理单元1320、发送单元、和接收单元1310可以与存储单元交互或者耦合,例如读取或者调用存储单元中的数据和/或信令,以使得上述实施例的方法被执行。Optionally, the device 1300 may also include a storage unit for storing data and/or signaling, and the processing unit 1320, the sending unit, and the receiving unit 1310 may interact or couple with the storage unit, for example, read or call the data and/or signaling in the storage unit, so that the method of the above embodiment is executed.
以上各个单元可以独立存在,也可以全部或者部分集成。The above units can exist independently or be fully or partially integrated.
参见图14,图14是适用于本申请实施例的用终端设备1400的结构示意图。该终端设备1400可应用于图1所示出的系统中。为了便于说明,图14仅示出了终端设备的主要部件。如图14所示,终端设备 1400包括处理器、存储器、控制电路、天线以及输入输出装置。处理器用于控制天线以及输入输出装置收发信号,存储器用于存储计算机程序,处理器用于从存储器中调用并运行该计算机程序,以执行本申请提出的用于注册的方法中由终端设备执行的相应流程和/或操作。此处不再赘述。Referring to FIG. 14, FIG. 14 is a schematic diagram of the structure of a terminal device 1400 applicable to an embodiment of the present application. The terminal device 1400 can be applied to the system shown in FIG. 1. For ease of explanation, FIG. 14 only shows the main components of the terminal device. As shown in FIG. 14, the terminal device 1400 includes a processor, a memory, a control circuit, an antenna, and an input/output device. The processor is used to control the antenna and the input/output device to send and receive signals, the memory is used to store a computer program, and the processor is used to call and run the computer program from the memory to execute the corresponding process and/or operation performed by the terminal device in the registration method proposed in the present application. No further details are given here.
本领域技术人员可以理解,为了便于说明,图14仅示出了一个存储器和处理器。在实际的终端设备中,可以存在多个处理器和存储器。存储器也可以称为存储介质或者存储设备等,本申请实施例对此不做限制。Those skilled in the art will appreciate that, for ease of explanation, FIG. 14 shows only one memory and processor. In an actual terminal device, there may be multiple processors and memories. The memory may also be referred to as a storage medium or a storage device, etc., which is not limited in the embodiments of the present application.
参见图15,图15是本申请提出的通信装置1500的示意图。如图15所示,装置1500包括处理单元1510和发送单元1520。Referring to FIG15 , FIG15 is a schematic diagram of a communication device 1500 proposed in the present application. As shown in FIG15 , the device 1500 includes a processing unit 1510 and a sending unit 1520 .
处理单元1510,用于确定SRS资源的配置信息。The processing unit 1510 is configured to determine configuration information of SRS resources.
处理单元1510,还可以用于根据SRS确定信道状态。The processing unit 1510 may also be configured to determine a channel state according to the SRS.
发送单元1520,用于发送SRS资源的配置信息。The sending unit 1520 is configured to send configuration information of SRS resources.
装置1500和方法实施例中的网络设备对应,装置1500可以是方法实施例中的网络设备,或者方法实施例中的网络设备内部的芯片或功能模块。装置1500的相应单元用于执行图5所示的方法实施例中由网络设备执行的相应步骤。The apparatus 1500 corresponds to the network device in the method embodiment, and the apparatus 1500 may be the network device in the method embodiment, or a chip or functional module inside the network device in the method embodiment. The corresponding units of the apparatus 1500 are used to execute the corresponding steps executed by the network device in the method embodiment shown in FIG. 5 .
其中,装置1500中的处理单元1510用于执行方法实施例中网络设备内部对应于处理相关的步骤。例如,执行图9中S950。The processing unit 1510 in the apparatus 1500 is used to execute the steps related to the processing inside the network device in the method embodiment, for example, executing S950 in FIG9 .
装置1500中的发送单元1520,用于执行网络设备发送相关的步骤。例如,执行图9中S920。The sending unit 1520 in the apparatus 1500 is used to execute steps related to network device sending, for example, executing S920 in FIG. 9 .
装置1500还可以包括接收单元,用于执行方法实施例中网络设备的接收步骤。接收单元和发送单元1520可以组成收发单元,同时具有接收和发送的功能。其中,处理单元1510可以是至少一个处理器。发送单元可以是发射器或者接口电路。接收单元可以是接收器或者接口电路。接收器和发射器可以集成在一起组成收发器或者接口电路。The apparatus 1500 may further include a receiving unit for executing the receiving step of the network device in the method embodiment. The receiving unit and the sending unit 1520 may form a transceiver unit, which has the functions of receiving and sending. Among them, the processing unit 1510 may be at least one processor. The sending unit may be a transmitter or an interface circuit. The receiving unit may be a receiver or an interface circuit. The receiver and the transmitter may be integrated together to form a transceiver or an interface circuit.
该接收单元可以用于接收SRS。The receiving unit may be configured to receive an SRS.
可选的,装置1500还可以包括存储单元,用于存储数据和/或信令,处理单元1510、发送单元1520、和接收单元可以与存储单元交互或者耦合,例如读取或者调用存储单元中的数据和/或信令,以使得上述实施例的方法被执行。Optionally, the device 1500 may also include a storage unit for storing data and/or signaling, and the processing unit 1510, the sending unit 1520, and the receiving unit may interact or couple with the storage unit, for example, read or call the data and/or signaling in the storage unit, so that the method of the above embodiment is executed.
以上各个单元可以独立存在,也可以全部或者部分集成。The above units can exist independently or be fully or partially integrated.
参见图16,图16是适用于本申请实施例的网络设备1600的结构示意图,可以用于实现上述用于信道测量的方法中的网络设备的功能。可以为网络设备的结构示意图。Referring to Fig. 16, Fig. 16 is a schematic diagram of the structure of a network device 1600 applicable to an embodiment of the present application, which can be used to implement the functions of the network device in the above-mentioned method for channel measurement.
一种可能的方式中,例如在5G通信系统中的某些实现方案中,网络设备1600可以包括CU、DU和AAU,相比于LTE通信系统中的接入网设备由一个或多个射频单元,如远端射频单元(remote radio unit,RRU)1601和一个或多个基带单元(base band unit,BBU)来说原BBU的非实时部分将分割出来,重新定义为CU,负责处理非实时协议和服务、BBU的部分物理层处理功能与原RRU及无源天线合并为AAU、BBU的剩余功能重新定义为DU,负责处理物理层协议和实时服务。简而言之,CU和DU,以处理内容的实时性进行区分、AAU为RRU和天线的组合。In one possible way, for example, in some implementations of a 5G communication system, the network device 1600 may include a CU, a DU, and an AAU. Compared to the access network device in the LTE communication system, which is composed of one or more radio frequency units, such as a remote radio unit (RRU) 1601 and one or more base band units (BBU), the non-real-time part of the original BBU will be separated and redefined as a CU, which is responsible for processing non-real-time protocols and services, and part of the physical layer processing functions of the BBU are merged with the original RRU and passive antennas into an AAU, and the remaining functions of the BBU are redefined as a DU, which is responsible for processing physical layer protocols and real-time services. In short, CU and DU are distinguished by the real-time nature of the processing content, and AAU is a combination of RRU and antenna.
CU、DU、AAU可以采取分离或合设的方式,所以,会出现多种网络部署形态,一种可能的部署形态与传统4G接入网设备一致,CU与DU共硬件部署。应理解,图16只是一种示例,对本申请的保护范围并不限制,例如,部署形态还可以是DU部署在5G BBU机房,CU集中部署或DU集中部署,CU更高层次集中等。CU, DU, and AAU can be separated or co-located, so there will be a variety of network deployment forms. One possible deployment form is consistent with the traditional 4G access network equipment, and CU and DU are deployed in the same hardware. It should be understood that Figure 16 is only an example and does not limit the scope of protection of this application. For example, the deployment form can also be DU deployed in the 5G BBU room, CU centralized deployment or DU centralized deployment, CU higher-level centralized, etc.
该AAU 1601可以实现收发功能称为收发单元1601。可选地,该收发单元1601还可以称为收发机、收发电路、或者收发器等,其可以包括至少一个天线16011和射频单元16016。可选地,收发单元1601可以包括接收单元和发送单元,接收单元可以对应于接收器(或称接收机、接收电路),发送单元可以对应于发射器(或称发射机、发射电路)。该CU和DU 1602可以实现内部处理功能称为处理单元1602。可选地,该处理单元1602可以对接入网设备进行控制等,可以称为控制器。该AAU 1601与CU和DU 1602可以是物理上设置在一起,也可以物理上分离设置的。The AAU 1601 can implement the transceiver function and is called the transceiver unit 1601. Optionally, the transceiver unit 1601 can also be called a transceiver, a transceiver circuit, or a transceiver, etc., which may include at least one antenna 16011 and a radio frequency unit 16016. Optionally, the transceiver unit 1601 may include a receiving unit and a transmitting unit, the receiving unit may correspond to a receiver (or receiver, receiving circuit), and the transmitting unit may correspond to a transmitter (or transmitter, transmitting circuit). The CU and DU 1602 can implement internal processing functions and be called a processing unit 1602. Optionally, the processing unit 1602 can control the access network device, etc., and can be called a controller. The AAU 1601 and the CU and DU 1602 may be physically arranged together or physically separated.
另外,接入网设备不限于图16所示的形态,也可以是其它形态:例如:包括BBU和ARU,或者包括BBU和AAU;也可以为CPE,还可以为其它形态,本申请不限定。In addition, the access network equipment is not limited to the form shown in FIG. 16 , but may be in other forms: for example, including BBU and ARU, or including BBU and AAU; it may also be CPE, or may be in other forms, which are not limited in the present application.
应理解,图16所示的网络设备1600能够实现图5的方法实施例中涉及的网络设备。网络设备1600中的各个单元的操作和/或功能,分别为了实现本申请方法实施例中由网络设备执行的相应流程。为避免 重复,此处适当省略详述描述。图16示例的网络设备的结构仅为一种可能的形态,而不应对本申请实施例构成任何限定。本申请并不排除未来可能出现的其他形态的网络设备结构的可能。It should be understood that the network device 1600 shown in FIG. 16 can implement the network device involved in the method embodiment of FIG. 5. The operations and/or functions of each unit in the network device 1600 are respectively to implement the corresponding processes executed by the network device in the method embodiment of the present application. Repeatedly, detailed description is appropriately omitted here. The structure of the network device illustrated in FIG16 is only a possible form and should not constitute any limitation to the embodiments of the present application. The present application does not exclude the possibility of other forms of network device structures that may appear in the future.
本申请实施例还提供一种通信系统,其包括前述的终端设备和网络设备。An embodiment of the present application also provides a communication system, which includes the aforementioned terminal device and network device.
本申请还提供了一种计算机可读存储介质,该计算机可读存储介质中存储有指令,当该指令在计算机上运行时,使得计算机执行上述如图9所示的方法中终端设备执行的各个步骤。The present application also provides a computer-readable storage medium, in which instructions are stored. When the instructions are executed on a computer, the computer executes each step executed by the terminal device in the method shown in FIG. 9 .
本申请还提供了一种计算机可读存储介质,该计算机可读存储介质中存储有指令,当该指令在计算机上运行时,使得计算机执行上述如图9所示的方法中网络设备执行的各个步骤。The present application also provides a computer-readable storage medium, in which instructions are stored. When the instructions are executed on a computer, the computer executes each step executed by the network device in the method shown in FIG. 9 .
本申请还提供了一种包含指令的计算机程序产品,当该计算机程序产品在计算机上运行时,使得计算机执行如图9所示的方法中终端设备执行的各个步骤。The present application also provides a computer program product including instructions. When the computer program product is run on a computer, the computer is enabled to execute each step executed by the terminal device in the method shown in FIG. 9 .
本申请还提供了一种包含指令的计算机程序产品,当该计算机程序产品在计算机上运行时,使得计算机执行如图9所示的方法中网络设备执行的各个步骤。The present application also provides a computer program product comprising instructions. When the computer program product is run on a computer, the computer is enabled to execute each step executed by the network device in the method shown in FIG. 9 .
本申请还提供一种芯片,包括处理器。该处理器用于读取并运行存储器中存储的计算机程序,以执行本申请提供的用于信道测量的方法中由终端设备执行的相应操作和/或流程。可选地,该芯片还包括存储器,该存储器与该处理器通过电路或电线与存储器连接,处理器用于读取并执行该存储器中的计算机程序。进一步可选地,该芯片还包括通信接口,处理器与该通信接口连接。通信接口用于接收处理的数据和/或信息,处理器从该通信接口获取该数据和/或信息,并对该数据和/或信息进行处理。该通信接口可以是该芯片上的输入/输出接口、接口电路、输出电路、输入电路、管脚或相关电路等。所述处理器也可以体现为处理电路或逻辑电路。The present application also provides a chip, including a processor. The processor is used to read and run a computer program stored in a memory to execute the corresponding operations and/or processes performed by a terminal device in the method for channel measurement provided by the present application. Optionally, the chip also includes a memory, which is connected to the processor through a circuit or wire, and the processor is used to read and execute the computer program in the memory. Further optionally, the chip also includes a communication interface, and the processor is connected to the communication interface. The communication interface is used to receive processed data and/or information, and the processor obtains the data and/or information from the communication interface and processes the data and/or information. The communication interface can be an input/output interface, an interface circuit, an output circuit, an input circuit, a pin or a related circuit on the chip. The processor can also be embodied as a processing circuit or a logic circuit.
本申请还提供一种芯片,包括处理器。该处理器用于读取并运行存储器中存储的计算机程序,以执行本申请提供的用于信道测量的方法中由网络设备执行的相应操作和/或流程。可选地,该芯片还包括存储器,该存储器与该处理器通过电路或电线与存储器连接,处理器用于读取并执行该存储器中的计算机程序。进一步可选地,该芯片还包括通信接口,处理器与该通信接口连接。通信接口用于接收处理的数据和/或信息,处理器从该通信接口获取该数据和/或信息,并对该数据和/或信息进行处理。该通信接口可以是该芯片上的输入/输出接口、接口电路、输出电路、输入电路、管脚或相关电路等。所述处理器也可以体现为处理电路或逻辑电路。The present application also provides a chip, including a processor. The processor is used to read and run a computer program stored in a memory to execute the corresponding operations and/or processes performed by a network device in the method for channel measurement provided by the present application. Optionally, the chip also includes a memory, which is connected to the processor through a circuit or wire, and the processor is used to read and execute the computer program in the memory. Further optionally, the chip also includes a communication interface, and the processor is connected to the communication interface. The communication interface is used to receive processed data and/or information, and the processor obtains the data and/or information from the communication interface and processes the data and/or information. The communication interface can be an input/output interface, an interface circuit, an output circuit, an input circuit, a pin or a related circuit on the chip. The processor can also be embodied as a processing circuit or a logic circuit.
上述的芯片也可以替换为芯片系统,这里不再赘述。The above-mentioned chip can also be replaced by a chip system, which will not be described here.
本申请中的术语“包括”和“具有”以及他们的任何变形,意图在于覆盖不排他的包含,例如,包含了一系列步骤或单元的过程、方法、系统、产品或设备不必限于清楚地列出的那些步骤或单元,而是可包括没有清楚地列出的或对于这些过程、方法、产品或设备固有的其它步骤或单元。The terms "including" and "having" and any variations thereof in this application are intended to cover non-exclusive inclusions. For example, a process, method, system, product or apparatus comprising a series of steps or units is not necessarily limited to those steps or units explicitly listed, but may include other steps or units not explicitly listed or inherent to these processes, methods, products or apparatuses.
本领域普通技术人员可以意识到,结合本文中所公开的实施例描述的各示例的单元及算法步骤,能够以电子硬件、或者计算机软件和电子硬件的结合来实现。这些功能究竟以硬件还是软件方式来执行,取决于技术方案的特定应用和设计约束条件。专业技术人员可以对每个特定的应用来使用不同方法来实现所描述的功能,但是这种实现不应认为超出本申请的范围。Those of ordinary skill in the art will appreciate that the units and algorithm steps of each example described in conjunction with the embodiments disclosed herein can be implemented in electronic hardware, or a combination of computer software and electronic hardware. Whether these functions are performed in hardware or software depends on the specific application and design constraints of the technical solution. Professional and technical personnel can use different methods to implement the described functions for each specific application, but such implementation should not be considered to be beyond the scope of this application.
所属领域的技术人员可以清楚地了解到,为描述的方便和简洁,上述描述的系统、装置和单元的具体工作过程,可以参考前述方法实施例中的对应过程,在此不再赘述。Those skilled in the art can clearly understand that, for the convenience and brevity of description, the specific working processes of the systems, devices and units described above can refer to the corresponding processes in the aforementioned method embodiments and will not be repeated here.
在本申请所提供的几个实施例中,应该理解到,所揭露的系统、装置和方法,可以通过其它的方式实现。例如,以上所描述的装置实施例仅仅是示意性的,例如,所述单元的划分,仅仅为一种逻辑功能划分,实际实现时可以有另外的划分方式,例如多个单元或组件可以结合或者可以集成到另一个系统,或一些特征可以忽略,或不执行。另一点,所显示或讨论的相互之间的耦合或直接耦合或通信连接可以是通过一些接口,装置或单元的间接耦合或通信连接,可以是电性,机械或其它的形式。In the several embodiments provided in the present application, it should be understood that the disclosed systems, devices and methods can be implemented in other ways. For example, the device embodiments described above are only schematic. For example, the division of the units is only a logical function division. There may be other division methods in actual implementation, such as multiple units or components can be combined or integrated into another system, or some features can be ignored or not executed. Another point is that the mutual coupling or direct coupling or communication connection shown or discussed can be through some interfaces, indirect coupling or communication connection of devices or units, which can be electrical, mechanical or other forms.
所述作为分离部件说明的单元可以是或者也可以不是物理上分开的,作为单元显示的部件可以是或者也可以不是物理单元,即可以位于一个地方,或者也可以分布到多个网络单元上。可以根据实际的选择其中的部分或者全部单元来实现本实施例方案的目的。The units described as separate components may or may not be physically separated, and the components shown as units may or may not be physical units, that is, they may be located in one place or distributed on multiple network units. Some or all of the units may be selected according to actual conditions to achieve the purpose of the solution of this embodiment.
另外,在本申请各个实施例中的各功能单元可以集成在一个处理单元中,也可以是各个单元单独物理存在,也可以两个或两个以上单元集成在一个单元中。In addition, each functional unit in each embodiment of the present application may be integrated into one processing unit, or each unit may exist physically separately, or two or more units may be integrated into one unit.
所述功能如果以软件功能单元的形式实现并作为独立的产品销售或使用时,可以存储在一个计算机可读取存储介质中。基于这样的理解,本申请的技术方案本质上或者说对现有技术做出贡献的部分或者该技术方案的部分可以以软件产品的形式体现出来,该计算机软件产品存储在一个存储介质中,包括若 干指令用以使得一台计算机设备(可以是个人计算机,服务器,或者网络设备等)执行本申请各个实施例所述方法的全部或部分步骤。而前述的存储介质包括:U盘、移动硬盘、只读存储器(read-only memory,ROM)、随机存取存储器(random access memory,RAM)、磁碟或者光盘等各种可以存储程序代码的介质。If the functions are implemented in the form of software functional units and sold or used as independent products, they can be stored in a computer-readable storage medium. Based on this understanding, the technical solution of the present application, or the part that contributes to the prior art, or the part of the technical solution, can be embodied in the form of a software product, and the computer software product is stored in a storage medium, including The instructions are used to enable a computer device (which may be a personal computer, a server, or a network device, etc.) to execute all or part of the steps of the methods described in the various embodiments of the present application. The aforementioned storage medium includes: a USB flash drive, a mobile hard disk, a read-only memory (ROM), a random access memory (RAM), a magnetic disk or an optical disk, and other media that can store program codes.
另外,本申请中术语“和/或”,仅仅是一种描述关联对象的关联关系,表示可以存在三种关系,例如,A和/或B,可以表示:单独存在A,同时存在A和B,单独存在B这三种情况。另外,本文中字符“/”,一般表示前后关联对象是一种“或”的关系;本申请中术语“至少一个”,可以表示“一个”和“两个或两个以上”,例如,A、B和C中至少一个,可以表示:单独存在A,单独存在B,单独存在C、同时存在A和B,同时存在A和C,同时存在C和B,同时存在A和B和C,这七种情况。In addition, the term "and/or" in this application is only a description of the association relationship of associated objects, indicating that there may be three relationships. For example, A and/or B can represent three situations: A exists alone, A and B exist at the same time, and B exists alone. In addition, the character "/" in this article generally indicates that the associated objects before and after are in an "or" relationship; the term "at least one" in this application can mean "one" and "two or more". For example, at least one of A, B and C can represent seven situations: A exists alone, B exists alone, C exists alone, A and B exist at the same time, A and C exist at the same time, C and B exist at the same time, and A, B and C exist at the same time.
以上所述,仅为本申请的具体实施方式,但本申请的保护范围并不局限于此,任何熟悉本技术领域的技术人员在本申请揭露的技术范围内,可轻易想到变化或替换,都应涵盖在本申请的保护范围之内。因此,本申请的保护范围应以所述权利要求的保护范围为准。 The above is only a specific implementation of the present application, but the protection scope of the present application is not limited thereto. Any person skilled in the art who is familiar with the present technical field can easily think of changes or substitutions within the technical scope disclosed in the present application, which should be included in the protection scope of the present application. Therefore, the protection scope of the present application should be based on the protection scope of the claims.
Claims (31)
or,
or,
The method according to claim 11, characterized in that the cyclic shift corresponding to the first port satisfies the following relationship:
The function g(x,y) = xmody or or,
The function g(x,y) = xmody or or,
The function g(x,y) = xmody or or,
or,
or,
The method according to claim 23, characterized in that the cyclic shift corresponding to the first port satisfies the following relationship:
The function g(x,y) = xmody or or,
The function g(x,y) = xmody or or,
The function g(x,y) = xmody or or,
Applications Claiming Priority (4)
Application Number | Priority Date | Filing Date | Title |
---|---|---|---|
CN202310388919 | 2023-04-07 | ||
CN202310388919.1 | 2023-04-07 | ||
CN202310541581.9 | 2023-05-12 | ||
CN202310541581.9A CN118784186A (en) | 2023-04-07 | 2023-05-12 | Communication method, device and system |
Publications (1)
Publication Number | Publication Date |
---|---|
WO2024208317A1 true WO2024208317A1 (en) | 2024-10-10 |
Family
ID=92971365
Family Applications (1)
Application Number | Title | Priority Date | Filing Date |
---|---|---|---|
PCT/CN2024/085989 WO2024208317A1 (en) | 2023-04-07 | 2024-04-03 | Communication method, apparatus and system |
Country Status (1)
Country | Link |
---|---|
WO (1) | WO2024208317A1 (en) |
Citations (3)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
CN102595514A (en) * | 2011-01-12 | 2012-07-18 | 上海贝尔股份有限公司 | Configuration method for non-periodic detection reference signal |
US20150023270A1 (en) * | 2012-02-20 | 2015-01-22 | Lg Electronics Inc. | Method and apparatus for transmitting uplink signal in wireless communication system |
CN115053592A (en) * | 2020-02-13 | 2022-09-13 | 高通股份有限公司 | Enhanced sounding reference signal resource configuration |
-
2024
- 2024-04-03 WO PCT/CN2024/085989 patent/WO2024208317A1/en unknown
Patent Citations (3)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
CN102595514A (en) * | 2011-01-12 | 2012-07-18 | 上海贝尔股份有限公司 | Configuration method for non-periodic detection reference signal |
US20150023270A1 (en) * | 2012-02-20 | 2015-01-22 | Lg Electronics Inc. | Method and apparatus for transmitting uplink signal in wireless communication system |
CN115053592A (en) * | 2020-02-13 | 2022-09-13 | 高通股份有限公司 | Enhanced sounding reference signal resource configuration |
Non-Patent Citations (1)
Title |
---|
PETER GAAL, QUALCOMM INCORPORATED: "SRS enhancement for TDD CJT and 8 Tx operation", 3GPP DRAFT; R1-2301399; TYPE DISCUSSION; NR_MIMO_EVO_DL_UL-CORE, vol. RAN WG1, 17 February 2023 (2023-02-17), Athens, GR, pages 1 - 26, XP052248532 * |
Similar Documents
Publication | Publication Date | Title |
---|---|---|
JP7049399B2 (en) | Systems and methods for generating phase noise tracking reference signal sequences using demodulated reference signals | |
JP7227297B2 (en) | Data communication method, terminal and base station | |
CN108632193B (en) | A resource indication method, network equipment, and terminal equipment | |
CN111713045B (en) | Method and device for transmitting reference signal | |
CN116232834A (en) | Method for generating reference signal, method for detecting reference signal, and communication device | |
WO2024061236A1 (en) | Method for sending and receiving reference signal, and communication apparatus | |
WO2023011613A1 (en) | Wireless communication method and apparatus | |
CN115941410A (en) | Wireless communication method and device | |
JP2022506303A (en) | Reference signal sequence generation method and device for demodulation | |
WO2024140647A1 (en) | Measurement method, apparatus, and system | |
EP3857775A1 (en) | Burst detection in wireless communications | |
CN115380493B (en) | A method and communication device for sending and receiving uplink reference signal | |
CN115706629A (en) | Communication method and device | |
CN115484133A (en) | A method and device for indicating a demodulation reference signal | |
CN111130721B (en) | Data transmission method and device | |
JP7215634B2 (en) | User Equipment and Base Station | |
WO2024208317A1 (en) | Communication method, apparatus and system | |
CN118804313A (en) | Port indication method, device and system | |
CN118784186A (en) | Communication method, device and system | |
WO2019114467A1 (en) | Method and device for indicating channel resource set, and computer storage medium | |
JP7176602B2 (en) | USER EQUIPMENT, BASE STATION, USER EQUIPMENT METHOD, AND BASE STATION METHOD | |
CN116437385A (en) | Method and device for transmitting reference signal | |
CN112398625B (en) | A communication method and device | |
WO2024069591A1 (en) | Devices, methods and apparatuses for srs enhancement | |
CN119382843A (en) | Sounding reference signal transmission method, device and storage medium |
Legal Events
Date | Code | Title | Description |
---|---|---|---|
121 | Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application |
Ref document number: 24784399 Country of ref document: EP Kind code of ref document: A1 |